close

Enter

Log in using OpenID

Year 1 Lab manual 2013 V1.1 - School of Physics and Astronomy

embedDownload
SCHOOL OF PHYSICS AND
ASTRONOMY
FIRST YEAR LABORATORY
PX 1123
Introductory Practical Physics I
PX1223
Introductory Practical Physics II
Academic Year 2013 - 2014
NAME:
Lab group:
1
Welcome to the 1st year laboratory, IntroductoryPractical Physics I & II,
modules PX1123 in the Autumn semester and PX1223 in the Spring
semester. You will need to bring this manual with you to every laboratory
session, as you will find all the relevant information you need for the
laboratory classes. It is essential that you read carefully through the manual
as it contains: the instructions that you will need to follow in order to
undertake the individual experiments; logistical information; tips on how to
keep your laboratory diary and how to write up your end-of-term reports;
background notes on fundamental topics with which you need to be familiar;
and health & safety issues that relate to the experiments themselves. You are
expected to have pre-read each relevant section prior to coming to your
weekly laboratory session.
This manual is divided into 3 sections, described in more detail overleaf, and
should be your first port of call for any information about the laboratory
work.
If you cannot find the information that you are looking for, please ask any
member of the teaching team - your Lab Supervisor, the demonstrators or
the module organizer (Dr. C.Tucker, room N1.15).
Lab Supervisor:
Contact email:
Demonstrators:
2
CONTENTS:
I:
II:
Introduction and logistics of the 1st Year laboratory
4
Organisation and administration of the laboratory
4
Recording experimental results in your lab notebook
7
Writing-up full reports of experiments
9
Safety In the Laboratorys: Risk Assessment and
12
Code of Practice
13
Experiments
14
Timetable and list of experiments
15
Check list for experiments
15
Laboratory notes for experiments
16 - 117
III:
Background notes
118
III.1
Background notes to experiments
118
Introduction to electronics experiments
How to use a Vernier scale
The oscilloscope
The multimeter
III.2
Analysis of experimental data: Errors in Measurement
130
III.3
Use of Microsoft Word & Excel 2007
161
III.4
Reporting on experimental work
164
An example of how to write a long report
167
Checklists
177
3
I:
INTRODUCTION AND LOGISTICS OF THE 1ST YEAR
LABORATORY
ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF THE LABORATORY
INTRODUCTION
There are 11 laboratory sessions in the Autumn Semester and 11 in the Spring Semester.
They are designed with several objectives.
1. To provide familiarity and build confidence with a range of apparatus.
2. To provide training in how to perform experiments and teach you the techniques
of scientific measurement.
3. To give you practise in recording your observations and communicating your
findings to others.
4. To demonstrate theoretical ideas in physics, which you will encounter in your
lecture courses.
5. To understand the important role of experimental physics
The majority of the work you will do in the laboratory will be experimental, and will be
performed individually. However there will be 1 or 2 sessions designed to give you
practise on experimental technique, the handling of errors, writing of formal reports and a
small number of group experiments.
ATTENDANCE
Class Times. Labs run from 13:30 to 17:30 on Monday, Tuesday and Thursday
afternoons. Students will be assigned one laboratory afternoon.
Attendance is compulsory; absence requires a self certificate or medical certificate.
Registration. Attendance will be recorded. Students are expected to sign out of the
laboratory if leaving before the end of the session.
GEOGRAPHY AND MANNING OF THE LABORATORY
The main laboratory suite consists of room N1.34. In addition, there are two dark rooms
which are used for optics experiments and for experiments using gases or radioactive
material. The far end of the laboratory is set aside for tea-time refreshments.
The laboratory is maintained by a technician Mr. Nic Tripp, from whom you can get your
laboratory diary.
ORGANISATION AND SUPERVISION OF PRACTICAL WORK
The lecturer in charge of the teaching of your laboratory is the Lab Supervisor. In
addition there will be 3 demonstrators who, between them, are familiar with all of the
experiements you undertake. These people are there to help you, and answer any
questions associated with your experiment. In addition they will assess, mark and provide
feedback on your work. Learn to use them!
4
All observations made during an experiment should be entered in your laboratory diary
(available from Mr. Nic Tripp, located in the room opposite the lab entrance). Each week
you will be allocated an experiment and you will normally be expected to complete this,
performing appropriate calculations, drawing graphs etc. by 17:30hrs of that day. You
will then be given until 16:00 hrs the following day to complete any analysis and draw
conclusions on your work, ready for handing in. The hand in deadline of 16:00 on
the day following your laboratory session is hard and fast! Further details on the
handing in of laboratory diaries will be given at the beginning of the session and are laid
out below.
At the end of a lab session you are to have your lab diary signed out by a demonstrator.
This will allow us to assess how much work you have achieved during the lab session,
how much finishing off work has been required and that you are employing the proper use
of a Lab Diary.
It is essential that you put aside about ВЅ hour before you come to the practical
class in order to read through some of the experimental notes associated with the practical
that you will be undertaking. It is anticipated that you should read any introductory
section up to the experimental part itself. This will enable you to gain familiarity with the
physics behind the experiment – you should not worry so much about any new lectured
material but refresh your understanding from A-level and school studies. Get yourself
happy with what is expected of you so you can plan your experiment, which will save you
time on the day. Also you must think about the safety considerations that are required for
your experimental work and write a risk assessment, which will be signed off prior to
commencing any practical work.
ASSESSMENT OF PRACTICAL WORK
The responsibility for handing your work in at the correct time is yours, and failure to do
so will usually mean that a mark of zero will be recorded. However any completed work
will be marked for your benefit and to provide you with feedback. Exceptions to this rule
will normally be made only for illness, for which you have notified the School or for
extenuating circumstance for which the relevant form has been submitted.
In addition to your weekly lab-diary assessment, in each of the two semesters, you will be
required to write up one experiment in the form of a formal report. This will be allocated
by your Lab Supervisor towards the end of each semester. Formal reports should NOT be
written in your lab diary but wordprocessed on sheets of paper that are either bound or
stapled. Marked reports will be returned to you, with feedback, and you should keep these
as they should provide a basis for the reports you will have to write in subsequent years.
Each experiment and each report will be marked out of 20 in accordance with the scheme:
16+ = exceptionally good, contains good physicists’ reasoning; 14+ = very good solid
performance 12+ = good performance which could be improved; 10+ = competent
performance but with some key omissions; 8+ = bare pass; 7- = fail. Your final module
mark (see Undergraduate Handbook) will be made up as follows:
Formal report
33.3%
5
Experimental lab diaries
66.7%
While the experimental notes of all experiments and reports will be assessed and
individual marks logged, your total marks will normally be obtained by expressing the
total marks you obtain during the session as a percentage of the total which you could
have obtained during the session. Exceptions for missed work will normally be made in
the cases of absence due to illness for which a medical certificate has been supplied;
absence for an extenuating, unavoidable reason for which you notified a member of staff;
difficulty with an experiment for reasons which were not your responsibility and which
you discussed with the demonstrator.
REFRESHMENT ARRANGEMENTS
Tea, coffee, squash and chocolate, will be available in the laboratory about halfway
through the afternoon and provide a mid-point break.
Tea and coffee: Payment for these must be made at the beginning of the semester and will
cover the whole semester. Prices will be announced at the first laboratory class.
Snacks/chocolate: Payment individually at the time of purchase, but cheap в�є.
6
RECORDING EXPERIMENTS IN YOUR LAB. BOOK / DIARY
AIM: to RECORD the results of your work, details of the experimental set up and best
experimental practise, analysis of results related back to the underlying physics.
The aim of keeping a good laboratory diary is to record your work in a manner clear
enough that you or a colleague could understand and attempt to repeat the experiment.
It is a record of your observations, measurements and understanding of the experiment.
It is not a neat essay containing the background theory or paragraphs copied from other
sources, but a real-time account of your experiemental method and findings.
When assessing your laboratory write-up, the demonstrator is interested in your
measurements, observations, results and conclusions. You should aim to present to
him/her a set of measurements and results taken and recorded in such a way that they can
understand easily what each number means, what results you have derived, and what
conclusions you have drawn. You should also make notes of any difficulties experienced
and sources of uncertainty or error. Ideally the record should be such that you could
yourself reconstruct the course of the experiment later - perhaps 20 years later - without
difficulty. The measurements presented to the demonstrator should be those taken during
the performance of the experiment they should not be rewritten before presentation.
A full written report of the background physics, purpose and extent of the experiment is
not required with the experimental results; that task is performed once a semester when
you are asked to produce a full report for a single experiement only.
A successful and quality record of experimental work is within the reach of all students,
providing:
1) all the measurements needed, or which you think might be needed, are
made at the time the experiment is performed;
•
Before you begin the collection of data, decide what you are going to do and how
you are going to do it. To achieve this you need to have thought about the
experiment before you begin it, to try out the apparatus and perhaps to have made
some trial measurements.
2) the measurements are recorded clearly and completely;
•
A sketch of the apparatus, or of parts of the apparatus, labelled to correspond with
the measurements, often helps, and serves as a very useful reminder of the
experimental arrangement. You will find the equipment that you use will have
unique identification numbers; make a note of these in your lab diary as these will
allow the teaching team to keep a track of acceptable results and any systematic
errors.
•
Make brief, succinct notes of what you have done, rather than a long and detailed
prose. Mention any specific problems and how you have overcome them. Mention
good experimental practise.
7
•
Record measurements systematically and concisely and, whenever possible,
tabulate them.
•
Always record first the actual measurements made and only then derive the values
of other quantities from them eg. if you are measuring the distance between two
points, record first the position of the two points against a scale and then subtract
the readings and also record the result. This minizes mistakes and allows you to
check results at a later date..
•
Record units and remember that a statement of precision is an essential part of
every measurement. A typical complete observation is l = 8.69 В± 0.01 mm.
•
Do not clutter the layout of measurements with arithmetic calculations - do these
on a separate page or separate part of the page.
•
If during the experiment you make a mistake, neatly cross out the incorrect values
and repeat them. NEVER rip out a page of a lab diary or completely obliterate
sections (they make on reflection later have been right).
•
Whenever possible, plot graphs as the measurements are made – outlier/rogue
data points can be identified readily, enabling repeat measurements to be made as
required. Any trends in the data can also be identified – eg. peaks, discontinuities
etc – in time for the experimenter to take more frequent/closely sampled readings
to confirm the observed behaviour.
•
Label the axes of graphs. Choose scales for the axes which make plotting easy
and, if possible, which allow the experimental precisions to be recorded sensibly.
Axes do not have to start at the origin; “zoom in” sensibly to best display the
results.
3) the results and conclusions are presented clearly. These in their turn will
be achieved by attention to the following points.
•
Present the results with a statement of precision and units. Always check that the
results that you have are sensible – are they “in the ball park” that you might
expect? Have you just predicted a speed quicker than the speed of light or a
mass smaller than the lightest subatomic particle?
•
Quote the generally accepted value of the quantity you have measured, easily
obtainable with a quick web-search or one of the standard books located in the
labratory. Try to account for any difference that you see. (remember to note
down where you got this �accepted’ value from).
•
Comment briefly on the experiment and results, and discuss how you might
extend and/or improve your experiment practise. This is important, as it
demonstrates that you have both thought about and understood well what you
have been doing. Note however this is not the same as self appraisal. “I think the
experiment went really well” is subjective, unscientific and meaningless.
8
WRITING UP FULL REPORTS OF EXPERIMENTS
AIM: to PRESENT the results of your work
The person marking your full report is interested in your description of the experiment.
They are not concerned with the actual measurements or quality of the results but are
concerned with the way these are presented in the report. You should aim to present a
clear, concise, report of the experiment you have performed, at a level able to be
understood by a fellow 1st Year student, who does not have expert knowledge of your
experiment. An example of a full report and further advice are given in section III. Very
importantly, your report must be original and not a copy of any part of the notes
provided with the experiment. It should be a report of what you did; not of what you
would like to have done or of what you think you should have done. That said, credit will
be given for discussions on how one might extend and improve an experiment, and what
might be done if the experiment were to be repeated.
It is normal practise in writing scientific papers to omit all details of calculations, and you
should also do this. Providing your report includes a statement of the basic theory which
you used, together with a record of your experimental observations (summarized if
appropriate) and the parameters which you obtain as a result of your calculations, it will
be possible for anyone who so wishes to check the calculations you perform.
The principles of report writing are simple: give the report a sensible structure; write in
proper, concise English; use the past tense passive voice, for example "... the
potentiometer was balanced ...". The following structure is suggested. It is not mandatory,
but you are strongly recommended to adopt it.
1) Follow the title with an abstract. Head this section “Abstract".
•
An abstract is a very brief (~50-100 words) synopsis of the experiment
performed. An example is "The speed of sound in a gas has been measured using the
standing wave cavity method for one gas (air) for a range of temperatures near room
temperature and for gases of different molecular weights (air, argon, carbon dioxide)
at room temperature. The speed in air near room temperature was found to be
proportional to TВЅ, where T is the gas temperature in Kelvin, and the ratio Cp/Cv for
air, argon and carbon dioxide at room temperature was found to be 1.402 В± 0.003,
1.668 В± 0.003 and 1.300 В± 0.003 respectively".
2) Follow the abstract, on a separate page, with an introduction to the
experiment. Head this section “Introduction”.
•
Here, you should state the purpose of the experiment, and outline the
principles upon which it was based. This section is often the most difficult to write.
On many occasions it is convenient to draft all the rest of the report and write this last.
Remember that the reader will, in general, not be as familiar with the subject matter as
the author. Start with a brief general survey of the particular area of physics under
investigation before plunging into details of the work performed.
9
•
Important formulae and equations to be used later in the report can often, with
advantage, be mentioned in the introduction as, by showing what quantities are to be
measured, their presence helps in the understanding of the experiment. Formulae or
equations should only be quoted at this stage. Derivations of formulae or equations
should be given either by references to sources, for example text books, or in full in
appendices. References should be given in the way described below.
3) Follow this with a description of the experimental procedure. Head this
“Experimental Procedure”.
• Write the experimental procedure as concisely as possible: give only the
essentials, but do mention any difficulties you experienced and how they were
overcome. Division of the description of the experimental procedure into sections,
each one dealing with the measurement of one quantity, is often convenient. If the
introduction to the experiment has been well designed this division will occur
naturally. Relegate any matters which can be treated separately, such as proofs of
formulae, to numbered appendices. Give references in the way described below.
• All diagrams, graphs or figures should be labelled as figures. Give each a
consecutive number (as in Figure 1 etc.), a brief title and, where possible, a brief
caption. Give each group or table of measurements a number (as in Table 1 etc.) and a
brief title, and use the numbers for reference from the text e.g. “the data in Figure 1
exhibits a straight . . .”
4) Follow this section with the results of the experiment, discussion of them and
comments. Head this “Results and discussion”.
• The result of the experiment can be stated quite briefly as "The value of X
obtained was N + Пѓ (N) UNITS". For example "The viscosity of water at 20В°C was
found to be (1.002 В± 0.001) x 10-3 N M-2 s".
• Discussion of the result, or of measurements, method etc., can be cross-referenced
by quoting the figure, table or report section numbers.
5) Follow this section with your conclusions. Head this “Conclusions”.
• The conclusions should restate, concisely, what you have achieved including the
results and associated uncertainties. Point the way forward for how you believe the
experiment could be improved
6) Follow this section with references. Head this “References” or “Bibliography”.
• The last section of the main body of the report is the bibliography, or list of
references. It is essential to provide references. There are two main styles used (along
with many subtle variations) to detail references. In the Harvard method, the name
10
of the first author along with the year of publication is inserted in the text, with full
details given, in alphabetical order, at the end of the document. The second style,
favoured here is known as the Vancouver approach, is slightly different. At the point
in your report at which you wish to make the reference, insert a number in square
brackets, e.g. [1]. Numbers should start with [1] and be in the order in which they
appear in the report. References should be given in the reference or bibliography
section, and should be listed in the order in which they appear in the report.
Where referencing a book, give the author list, title, publisher, place published, year
and if relevant, page number eg. [1] H.D. Young, R.A. Freedman, University Physics,
Pearson, San Francisco, 2004.
In the case of a journal paper, give the author list, title of article, journal title, vol no.,
page no.s, year. e.g. [2] M.S. Bigelow, N.N. Lepeshkin & R.W. Boyd, “Ultra-slow
and superluminal light propagation in solids at room temperature”, Journal of Physics:
Condensed Matter, 16, pp.1321-1340, 2004.
In the case of a webpage (note: use webpages carefully as information is sometimes
incorrect), give title, institution responsible, web address, and very importantly the
date on which the website was accessed eg. [3] “How Hearing Works”,
HowStuffWorks inc., http://science.howstuffworks.com/hearing.htm, accessed 13th
July 2008
6) Follow this section with any appendices. Head this “Appendices”.
•
Use the appendices to treat matters of detail which are not essential to the main
part of the report, but that help to clarify or expand on points made. Give each
appendix a different number to help cross referencing from other parts of the report
and note that to be useful appendices must be mentioned in the main body of the
report.
Health Warning: In subsequent years it may be necessary to develop this standard
report layout to deal with complex experiments or series of experiments.
11
SAFETY IN THE LABORATORY
The 1974 Health and Safety at Work Act places, on all workers, the legal obligation to
guard themselves and others against hazards arising from their work. This act applies to
students and teachers in university laboratories.
Maintaining a safe working environment in the laboratory is paramount. The following
points supplement those contained in "School of Physics Safety Regulations for
Undergraduates", a copy of which was given to you when you registered in the School.
1.
It is your responsibility to ensure that at all times you work in such a way as to
ensure your own safety and that of other persons in the laboratory.
2.
The treatment of serious injuries must take precedence over all other action
including the containment or cleaning up of radioactive contamination.
3.
None of the experiments in the laboratory is dangerous provided that normal
practices are followed. However, particular care should be exercised in those
experiments involving cryogenic fluids, lasers, gases and radioactive materials.
Relevant safety information will be found in the scripts for these experiments.
4.
If you are uncertain about any safety matter for any of the experiments, you
MUST consult a demonstrator.
5.
All accidents must be reported to a laboratory supervisor or technician who will
take the necessary action.
6.
After an accident a report form, which can be obtained from the technician, must
be completed and given to the laboratory supervisor.
7.
Please alert your Laboratory Supervisor of any medical condition (for e.g. having
a pacemaker) which may affect your ability to perform certain experiments.
UNDERGRADUATE EXPERIMENT RISK ASSESSMENT
The experiments you will perform in the first year Physics Laboratory are relatively free
of danger to health and safety. Nevertheless, an important element of your training in
laboratory work will be to introduce you to the need to assess carefully any risks
associated with a given experimental situation. As an aid towards this end, a sheet entitled
Code of Practice for Teaching Laboratories follows. At the commencement of each
experiment, you are asked to use the material on this sheet to arrive at a risk
assessment of the experiment you are about to perform. A statement (which may, in
some cases, be brief) of any risk(s) you perceive in the work should be recorded as an
additional item in your laboratory diary account of the experiment.
12
SCHOOL OF PHYSICS & ASTRONOMY: CODE OF PRACTICE FOR
TEACHING LABORATORIES
Electricity
Supplies to circuits using voltages greater than 25V ac or 60V dc
should be "hardwired" via plugs and sockets. Supplies of 25Vac, 60V
dc or less should be connected using 4 mm plugs and insulated leads,
the only exceptions being"breadboards". It is forbidden to open 13 A
plugs.
Chemicals
Before handling chemicals, the relevant Chemical Risk Assessment
forms must be obtained and read carefully.
Radioactive
Sources
Gloves must be worn and tweezers used when handling.
Lasers
Never look directly into a laser beam. Experiments should be
arranged to minimise reflected beams.
X-Rays
The X-ray generators in the teaching laboratories are inherently safe,
but the safety procedures given must be strictly followed.
Waste Disposal
"Sharps", ie, hypodermic needles, broken glass and sharp metal
pieces should be put in the yellow containers provided. Photographic
chemicals may be washed down the drain with plenty of water. Other
chemicals should be given to the Technician or Demonstrator for
disposal.
Liquid Nitrogen
Great care should be taken when using as contact with skin can cause
"cold burns". Goggles and gloves must be worn when pouring.
Natural Gas
Only approved apparatus can be connected to the gas supplies and
these should be turned off when not in use.
Compressed Air
This can be dangerous if mis-handled and should be used with care.
Any flexible tubing connected must be secured to stop it moving
when the supply is turned on.
Gas Cylinders
Must be properly secured by clamping to a bench or placed in
cylinder stands. The correct regulators must be fitted.
Machines
When using machines, eg, lathe and drill, eye protection must be
worn and guards in place. Long hair and loose clothing especially ties
should be secured so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts.
Machines can only be used under supervision.
Hand Tools
Care should be taken when using tools and hands kept away from the
cutting edges.
Hot Plates
Can cause burns. The temperature should be checked before
handling.
Ultrasonic Baths
Avoid direct bodily contact with the bath when in operation.
Vacuum
Equipment
If glassware is evacuated, implosion guarding must be used in
order to contain the glass in the event of an accident.
13
II:
EXPERIMENTS
TIME TABLE AND LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Week
Experiment
Title
Page
Autumn Semester (PX1123)
1
1
Introductory Exercises . Straight line graphs, including log
graphs, errors and how to combine them.
16
2-3
2
3
Group Experiment: Young’s Modulus.
Group Experiment: Coefficients of Friction.
18
20
4–9
(see list)
4
5
6
7
8
9
Statistics of Experimental Data (Gaussian Distribution).
Optics with Thin Lenses.
Introduction to Multimeters and Oscilloscopes.
Computer data-logging and RC circuits.
Radioactivity.
Rotational Motion and Moment of Inertia.
24
29
37
47
54
60
10
11
10
11
Long report writing.
Group challenge!
66
67
Spring Semester (PX1223)
1
12
Group Experiment: Air Resistance.
68
2–6
(see list)
13
14
15
16
17
Writing Long Reports.
Propogation of Sound in Gases.
Magnetic Fields and Electric Currents.
Variation of Resistance with Temperature.
Resistive and Reactive Impedances in RC Circuits.
69
70
73
80
84
7 – 11
(see list)
18
19
20
21
22
Optical Diffraction.
Measuring e/m for the electron.
X-rays.
Microwaves.
Computer simulations and analysis.
92
96
100
104
113
14
CHECKLIST
• Read through the notes on the experiment that you will be doing BEFORE coming to
the practical class. You will be expected to have read all the introductory notes and
refreshed yourself of any knowledge of the subject taught in school
• Read carefully through any additional sections that might be useful in Section III – eg.
use of electronic equipment, statistics., and also the diary checklist given at the end of
this manual.
• Think about the safety considerations that there might be associated with the practical,
having read through the lab notes. This can then be discussed with your demonstrator
prior to writing your risk assessment.
• On turning up to the lab, listen carefully to any briefing that is given by your
demonstrator: he/she will give you tips on how to do the experiment as well as
detailing any safety considerations relevant to your experiment.
• Write up the safety considerations.
• Check that the size of any quantities that you have been asked to derive/calculate are
sensible - ie. are they the right order of magnitude?
• Read through your account of your experiment before handing it in, checking that you
have included errors/error calculations, that you are quoting numbers to the correct
number of significant figures and that you have included units.
• Staple/attach any loose paper (eg. graphs, computer print-outs, questionnaires etc.)
into your lab book.
15
Exercise 1: Interpreting data
1.
A series of experimental results is given below. In each case the mean value of the
experimentally determined variable is given, together with the error.
(a) R = 0.732 Ω
E(R) = 0.003 Ω
(b) C = 9.993 ВµF
E(C) = 0.018 ВµF
(c) T1/2= 2.354 min
E(T1/2 ) = 11 sec
(d) R = 2.436 MΩ
E(R) = 23 Ω
(e) Wc = 11.562935 KHz
E(Wc) = 3.1 Hz
(f) d= 62165.551 m
E(d) = 26 cm
(g) f = 20 cm
E(f) = 0.03 cm
For each quantity, using SI units, write down the best final statement of the
result of each experimental determination.
2.
In the following questions the values of Z1, Z2 . . . are the given functions of the
independently measured quantities A, B and C. Calculate the values of, and errors in,
Z1, Z2 etc from the given values of, and errors in, A, B and C. Then state the final
result.
(a) Zl = C/A
A = 100
E(A) = 0.1
(b) Z2 = A-B
B = 0.1
E(B) = 0.005
(c) Z3 = 2AB2/C
C = 50
E(C) = 2
(d) Z4 = B loge C
(e) Z5 = A sin(C), where C above is expressed in degrees – think about how you
express the error!
3.. The variation of resistance, R, of a length of copper wire with temperature, T, is given
by:
R = Ro (1 + О±T)
where Ro and О± are constants.
Experimental data from a particular investigation (similar to Experiment 4) are given
in Table 1.3.
16
R(Ω
Ω)
2415
2490
2585
2625
2710
2755
T(K)
300
320
340
360
380
400
T(K)
420
440
460
480
500
520
R(Ω
Ω)
2820
2910
3050
3030
3115
3155
Table 1.3: Data for question 3
a)
b)
c)
d)
Which are the dependent and independent variables?
Plot a graph to show the variation of R with T.
Determine Ro and estimate the likely error.
Determine О± and estimate the likely error.
4. The activity, A , of a radioactive source is given by
A = Aoe-О»t
where Ao is the activity when time, t, = 0 and О» is the disintegration constant. Data
obtained by a 1st year student undertaking Experiment 6 are given in Table 1.4.
A (Counts in 10 sec)
5768
3391
1963
1231
718
415
t (mins)
0.5
2.5
4.5
6.5
8.5
10.5
Table 1.4: data for question 4
a) Plot a graph on linear paper showing the variation of A with t.
b) Plot a suitable graph on linear graph paper to determine О» and Ao
c) Plot a suitable graph on semi-log paper to determine О» and Ao
5. In one 1st Year experiment, measurements are made of the velocity of sound in a gas,
c. This can be related to Оі, the ratio of the principal specific heats of the gas by
Я›=
аЇ–а°®
аЇћаЇЌ
,
where m is the mass of one molecule of gas, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the
absolute temperature. Determine a value for Оі from the following data which was
obtained from an experiment with nitrogen:
c = (344 В± 20) ms-1; T = (292 В± 1) K
17
Experiment 2: Measuring Young’s Modulus
Note: This experiment is carried out in pairs.
Outline
Most students will be familiar with the concept of Young's Modulus from A level studies.
It is an extremely important characteristic of a material and is the numerical evaluation of
Hooke's Law, namely the ratio of stress to strain (the measure of resistance to elastic
deformation). You will design a basic experiment to verify Hooke’s law and determine
Young’s Modulus for a bar of wood.
Experimental skills
• Making and recording basic measurements of lengths, distances (and their
uncertainties/errors).
• Making use of repetitive measurements to improve error.
• Careful experimental observation and recording of results.
Wider Applications
• Young Modulus, E, is a material property that describes its stiffness and is therefore
one of the most important properties in engineering design.
• Young's modulus is not always the same in all orientations of a material. Most metals
and ceramics are isotropic, and their mechanical properties are the same in all
orientations. However anisotropy can be seen in some treated metals, many composite
materials, wood and reinfoirced concrete. Engineers can use this directional
phenomenon to their advantage in creating structures.
• Young's modulus is the most common elastic modulus used, but there are other elastic
moduli measured too, such as the bulk modulus and the shear modulus.
1. Introduction
The relation between the depression produced at the end of a horizontal weightless rule by
application of a vertical force F, as represented in Figure 1.1, is given by equation 1:
ЭЂ=
а®їаЇ…а°Ї
а¬·а®ѕаЇ‚аіЊ
,
[1]
where L is the projecting length, E is Young's modulus for the material of the rule and Ia
is the geometrical moment of inertia of cross section.
For the rectangularly-sectioned rule provided, which has width a and thickness b,
‫ܫ‬௔ =
аЇ”аЇ•а°Ї
ଵଶ
,
[2]
18
Figure 1.1: Representation of the deflection of horizontal rule by force, F
2. Experiment
•
•
Clamp the metre rule to the bench so that part of its length projects horizontally
beyond the bench edge.
Make suitable measurements to explore the validity of equation [1] and to measure E
for wood.
Reminder: Concluding remarks
Note: This reminder and the advice below are given since this is an early experiment - do
not expect to see such prompts in the future.
•
Summarise the main numerical findings (as always with errors), important
observations and what is understood and not understood at this time.
19
Experiment 3: Coefficients of Friction
Note: This experiment is carried out in pairs.
Outline
Most students are probably familiar with the mathematics of friction as applied to static
and moving bodies on the flat and on slopes. In this experiment the behaviour of a real (if
a little contrived) system of a short length of dowel travelling down a slope of variable
angle is investigated. Experience indicates that the system can behave unusually,
requiring the experimentalist to take data reproducibly and carefully note down their
observations.
Experimental skills
• Making and recording basic measurements: angles and times (and their errors).
• Making use of trial/survey experiments.
• Careful experimental observation and systematic approach to data taking.
Wider Applications
• Funny thing friction, sometimes you want it, sometimes you don’t; the rotation of
wheels on a car should be as frictionless as possible, but friction between tyres and the
road is absolutely essential.
• The difference between coefficient of friction in the limiting and kinetic cases leads to
“stick-slip” effects, where systems once they start moving move quickly, e.g. in
hydraulic cylinders and earthquakes.
1. Introduction
The motion of a body down a slope is a classic mechanics problem. In elementary texts
two types of systems are considered; zero and non-zero friction. The friction between two
surfaces is characterised by a dimensionless constant called the coefficient of friction, Вµ
and can often be related to the frictional force FF by
FF = ВµFN ,
[1]
where FN is the normal or reaction force between the body and the surface. Two types are
considered: limiting (or static) friction (ВµL) that prevents a static body from beginning to
move; and kinetic friction (ВµK) that acts on moving bodies. Usually ВµK is thought to be
slightly lower than (ВµL) but near enough so that they are considered equal in calculations.
This is illustrated in Figure 1.2, for a body initially at rest on a surface and subject to a
driving force that increases with time. The frictional force increases and matches the
driving force until the limiting condition is met, then the body starts to move and the
kinetic friction, which is slightly less than the limiting friction, operates always in the
opposite direction to that of the motion.
20
ВµLFN
Friction
force
ВµKFN
No
motion
motion
time
Figure 1.2. The frictional force acting on a body as the driving force is increased from zero.
1.1 Body on a slope
A body on a slope is an interesting system as there is no need to introduce external forces
in order to observe the effects of friction. In the following discussion, the angle of the
slope to the horizontal is given by Оё, the mass by m and the acceleration due to gravity by
g.
FN=mg.cosОё
FF
FS=mg.sinОё
Оё
mg
In your experiment this is
the wooden dowel
mg.cosОё
Figure 1.3. Forces acting on a body on a slope. The weight of the body can be resolved
perpendicular and parallel to the slope. The perpendicular component is exactly balanced by a
reaction force, FN.
As the angle of the slope increases the force on the body due to gravity acting down the
slope, Fs increases as
FS = mg sin Оё
[2]
At the same time the reaction force decreases as
FN = mg cos Оё
[3]
This is important because, from equation 1, the reaction force determines the frictional
forces.
21
The critical angle, ОёC
With no external forces acting the frictional force always acts up the slope and a critical
angle, Оёc can be defined at which the forces down and up the slope are identical and
beyond which the body starts to move down the slope. At the critical angle
mg sin Оё C = mgВµ L cos Оё C
tan Оё C = Вµ L
[4]
Therefore a simple experiment of the angle at which the body starts to move reveals ВµL.
Angles greater than the critical angle
Since in this regime the body is moving, it is the coefficient of kinetic friction that applies.
Now although there is an imbalance between the forces and the overall acceleration, the
acceleration, a, down the slope is given by:
or
a = g sinОё в€’ gВµ K cosОё = g(sinОё в€’ Вµ K cosОё )
[5]
Since this acceleration is constant (in ideal conditions) the familiar equations of motion
can be used. For example, the time, t a body starting from rest takes to move down a
slope of length, s is given by
s = 0 .5 at 2
[6]
2. Experiment
2.1 Apparatus
The simple apparatus used here consists of a channel, a stand to support it, a length of
dowel and a stop watch. The arrangement of the support and channel should be as
follows:
• The support should be placed on the upper bench and the bottom of the channel on the
lower bench.
• The channel should be supported so that it is “L” shaped, with a slight angle so that
the dowel remains close to the upright. (A “V” shaped arrangement should not be
used as it has been found that the dowel becomes easily wedged).
• Running the forks on the support through the holes in the channel ~30 cm from the top
of the channel seems a secure, stable and convenient method.
Note: The maximum angle of the slope permitted in this experiment is 30o.
2.2 Part 1. Survey/trial experiments (including timing errors)
Survey (or trial) experiments are a vital part of performing any new procedure; they are
used to get a feel for the behaviour of the system, to determine the most appropriate
methodology, to understand the important measuring ranges etc. In many first year
experiments, these trials are hidden from the students, in order to make best use of the
available time and apparatus. Nonetheless they will have been carried out by
demonstrators and supervisors in order to generate the lab scripts.
Therefore, this part of the experiment is being used as an opportunity to take students
through the surveying process.
• So, spend ~10 minutes “playing” with the equipment and making a note your
observations and some measurements if appropriate.
• Pick suitable conditions to perform a study of the reproducibility of “your” timing.
Note that this is not as easy as it sounds since an aim is to be able to later distinguish
between your timing error and real variations within the experiment.
22
2.3 Part 2. Determine the coefficient of limiting friction, ВµL.
• Use the experience you have gained to design and perform an experiment to determine
ВµL.
Your diary entry will need to describe your methodology and how the error was
determined and what you think it corresponds to.
2.4 Part 3. Determine the coefficient of kinetic friction, ВµK.
• Use the experience you have gained to design and perform experiments to determine
ВµK, exploring angles between ОёC and 30o.
• There are no obvious straight line graphs here, instead it is suggested that a graph of
ВµK against angle is plotted.
Reminder: Concluding remarks
Note: This reminder and the advice below are given since this is an early experiment - do
not expect to see such prompts in the future.
•
Summarise the main numerical findings (as always with errors), important
observations and what is understood and not understood at this time.
23
Experiment 4: The statistics of experimental data; the Gaussian
distribution.
Outline
The statistical nature of measured data is examined using an experiment in which ball
bearings are randomly deflected as they roll down an incline. Random behaviour is
expected to result in a “Gaussian” distribution, the most common mathematical
distribution in experimental physics. The experiment dwells on the progression from
small to large data sets, the emergence of the well known shape of the distribution and the
implications for data analysis and error estimation (i.e. the relationship to “accuracy and
precision” and “random and systematic errors”).
Experimental skills
• Statistical analysis of data in general.
• Analysis using the Gaussian distribution in particular.
Wider Applications
This experiment illustrates the unseen statistics behind all practical physics:
• When dealing with a small number (say ~ 12) data points, as you often do in these
laboratory experiments, it should always be remembered that the measurements
represent “samples” of an underlying data “distribution”.
• The majority of physics experiments result in underlying data distributions that are
Gaussian.
• Other important distributions include Poisson, Lorentzian and Binomial. The
distribution is governed by the underlying physics and/or statistics.
1. Introduction
Virtually all experiments are influenced by statistical considerations and have underlying
distributions of various types. However in most cases either not enough data is collected
or the data is not analysed in such a way as to reveal this fact. Consequently it is entirely
possible to perform crude but quite reasonable data analysis with little understanding of
its context. Clearly the training of physicists should progress them beyond such a
superficial level. This experiment is a very important role in training by taking you
through the techniques used when dealing with small, medium and large sets of data.
The experimental set up chosen uses random processes to produce a distribution that
consequently should be Gaussian and is appropriate here since most experiments produce
such distributions. What is rare is the opportunity for students to observe the emergence
of a distribution and consider the effect on data and error analysis.
Ultimately though, always remember that the concern of an experiment is to express a
measurement as “(value +/- error) units”. Statistics is simply the tool by which the
“value” and the “error” are determined. Reminder:
• Systematic errors - the result of a defect either in the apparatus or experimental
procedure leading to a (usually) constant error throughout a set of readings.
• Random errors - the result of a lack of consistency in either in the apparatus or
experimental procedure leading to a distribution of results.
• Accuracy - determined by how close the measured is to the true value, in other words
how correct the measurement is. A value can only be accurate if the systematic error
is small.
24
•
Precision - determined by how “exactly” a measurement can be made regardless of its
accuracy. Precision relates directly to the random error - a value can only be precise if
the random error is small (high precision means low random error, low precision
means high random error).
1.1. Simple statistical concepts
In all the experiments a series of values xl, x2 .... xn is obtained. Often the experimental
values differ, mainly due to the fact that some variable in the experiment has been
changed (usually the aim would then be to plot the data on a straight line graph). In this
discussion and the experiments that follow, the measurements recorded will be of
nominally the same value. They actual measurements will represent a sample of all the
possible measurements and these differences are due to variations in the system being
measured, the equipment used for measuring, or the operator.
From such measurements (taking xi as the ith value of x and n as the total number of
measurements) a number of statistical values can be found that are of relevance to the
understanding of the experiment:
1 n
[1]
µ = ∑ xi
Arithmetic mean
n i =1
The arithmetic mean has a special significance as this represents the best estimate of the
“true value” of the measurement. The error in an experiment can then be understood to
reflect the possible discrepancy between the arithmetic mean and the true value.
Superficially and practically for small n an estimate of (twice) the error might involve:
Data range
xmax - x min
Probable error
the range in which 50% of the values fall
With larger n (a larger sample) formal statistical terms such as “standard deviation”
become appropriate. The standard deviation, Пѓ(x) of an experiment is a value that reflects
the inherent dispersion or spread of the data (an experiment with high precision will have
a low standard deviation) and so is, like the “true value” an unattainable idealised
parameter. Practically, the available sample can be used to obtain a “sample standard
deviation”, σn(x) (the equivalent of finding the arithmetic mean of the measurements) and
this can be modified to give the “best estimate of the standard deviation”, sn(x):
sample standard deviation
пЈ®1 n
пЈ№
σ n ( x ) =  ∑ ( xi − µ )2
пЈ° n i =1
пЈ»
best estimate of the standard deviation
пЈ« n пЈ¶
sn ( x ) = пЈ¬
пЈ·
пЈ­ n в€’1пЈё
1/ 2
Пѓ n ( x)
12
[2]
[3]
Whilst standard deviations are related to errors and may be reasonable to use in some
circumstances they are not appropriate when there are a large number of measurements
and the distribution is well defined (see below for more on distributions). Here the
accepted error is the (best estimate of the) standard error:
s (x)
Пѓ n( x )
Best estimate of standard error
[4]
Пѓ ( xn ) = n
=
n1 2
(n в€’ 1)1 2
Note: All of the above values can be found without reference to the particular distribution
of the data.
25
1.2. Distributions
If measurements occur in discrete values (as they will in the following experiments) the
distribution can be drawn by plotting the number of times (frequency) a value is recorded
versus the value itself. (If the measurements are continuous then the values can be split
up into data ranges (eg x to x + dx) and then the frequency counted.)
However, the frequency of occurrence clearly depends on the number of attempts which
are made. A more fundamental property is the probability which experimentally is given
by
probability, P = number of occurrences
[5]
total number of events, n
It should be clear from this that the sums of probabilities should equal one.
mathematical functions that describe distributions are always probability functions.
The
1.3 The Gaussian (or Normal) distribution
All experimental results are affected by random errors. In practice it turns out that in
many cases the distribution function which best describes these random errors is the
Gaussian distribution given by:
пЈ® в€’ ( x в€’ Вµ )2 пЈ№
1
1
P( x ) =
. exp пЈЇ
[6]
пЈє
1
2
Пѓ
2
Пѓ
пЈЇ
пЈє
пЈ°
пЈ»
( 2ПЂ ) 2
P (x)
where Вµ is the mean value of x and Пѓ is the standard deviation. An example of a Gaussian
distribution is shown in figure 1; it is symmetrical about the mean has a characteristic bell
shape and ~68% of the measured values are expected within В± 1Пѓ of the mean (this range
is slightly larger than that covered by the “probable error”).
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
FWHM
FWHM
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
x
Figure 1 Gaussian probability function generated using
x n = 0 and Пѓ(x) = 1 resulting in the
x-axis being in units of standard deviation. The FWHM is wider than 2Пѓ(x).
26
2. Experimental
2.1 Apparatus
• The apparatus used here consists of a pin board, down which steel balls are rolled
individually (so that they do not interfere with each other). There is a row of 23 “bins”
at the base numbered from -11 to 0 to +11 (the discrete values representing the results
of this experiment).
• The pins are intended to induce a random motion of the balls so that the balls have a
distribution about their “true value” that is Gaussian.
• The design is such that the true value (ideal result) of the experiment is zero.
However, various biases can be imagined that might affect this and lead to a
systematic error (overall bias) that will be constant provided the equipment is not
disturbed.
• Approximately 50 balls are supplied and these constitute a “batch”.
2.2 Procedure
Although split into two parts it should be considered as a single continuous experiment in
which the number of trials, n, increases. In order to be able to monitor the “result”, and
the emerging Gaussian distribution, it is necessary to keep track of the results in the order
in which they are obtained. It would be impractical to note the result in order for every
ball (trial) however it is really only necessary to pay close attention to the first few trials.
• The first part of the experiment pays close attention to the “first batch” of ~50 trials.
• In the second part a further 4 batches are recorded and allow the accumulation of a
large data set. The total number of trials is then ~250.
2.2.1 Small-medium number statistics (n = 1 to ~50)
Note: In order to mimic the low n experiments that students usually perform the first
batch must be undertaken in stages; this ensures that unprejudiced decisions about errors
are made at each stage. Note: it will be very easy for diaries to become unintelligible
whilst working through this section - use headings, notes and comments to avoid this.
(i) First roll one ball down the slope and note its position.
• Clearly this “measurements is our current best estimate of the “true value”.
• What is the “result” of the experiment at this stage (i.e. value +/- error)? Is it in fact
possible to estimate an error (note - it must be non zero) at this stage? If it is not
possible then what are the implications for deciding on the size of the error bars that
are often drawn on graphs based on single measurements?
(ii) Roll another two balls down the slope (total = 3) and note their positions
• The best estimate of the “true value” is now the average of three measurements
(relevance: e.g. timing experiments are often performed three times).
• Realistically the estimated error here is obtained from the data range.
• Write down the result of the experiment at this stage (value +/- error).
Remember each trial should be performed identically - you should be aware of and write
down the details of the procedure at this point. It would be entirely reasonable to change
(improve) the methodology. This would entail repeating the first three trials (for
consistency later) and the diary entry should be clear.
(iii) Roll a further nine balls down the slope (total = 12) and note their positions
•
The best estimate of the “true value” is now the average/mean of a total of twelve
measurements (relevance: experiments in which straight line graphs are generated
often have approximately this number of data points).
27
•
The estimated error. With 12 measurements simply using the data range to obtain an
error value ought to be too pessimistic and statistical techniques can start to be used
(even though there are not enough data values for the shape of the distribution to have
emerged). Calculate and compare values for (0.5 x) range, the probable error,
standard deviations and standard error described above.
(Note: the above calculations can be performed using the statistical functions of a
calculator. This will save time later, but at this point students must confirm that the
correct method is being used by showing hand working and comparing with calculator +
statistical functions).
(iv) Roll the remainder of the batch down the slope and note their positions in order.
• For totals of 24 and ~50 trials calculate and compare values for (0.5 x) range, the
probable error, standard deviations and standard error.
• Use the values for n = 50 to draw a histogram and compare with shape of the Gaussian
distribution shown in figure 1. How well defined is the Gaussian distribution?
2.2.2 Large number statistics (n up to ~250)
In order to be able to monitor the further development of the experimental “result” and the
data distribution a further 4 batches of balls will be used. It would be impractical to note
the result in order for every ball (trial), instead send the balls down in batches (of ~50)
recording the distribution for each batch.
• Draw a suitable table in which to record the measurements.
• Perform and record the measurements.
Data distribution
• Draw a second table in which to record the calculated cumulative distributions for the
total of 1 (from section 2.2.1) 3 and 5 batches of measurements.
• For each case calculate the mean and sample/best estimate of the standard deviation
and standard error.
• Use the values for n ~ 250 and equation 6 to calculate the corresponding Gaussian
distribution and plot this on top of the measured distribution. Comment on the
agreement between them.
2.3 Analysis of the “result” of the experiment as a function of n
This section considers all of the results obtained.
• Consider (giving an explanation/justification) what is the most appropriate error value
to use for n = 3, 12, 24, 50 150 and 350. One decision here is; at what n does it
become appropriate to use standard error?
• Summarise the above in a table with columns for “value”, “most appropriate error
value” and “error type” (e.g. range, standard error etc).
• Plot a graph(s) of mean value, µ against n (for n = 3, 12, 24, 50, 150, and 250) using
the chosen error for the error bar.
• Finally, for the concluding remarks and drawing on the previous graph, summarise
what has been learnt about the systematic and random errors and accuracy and
precision of the experiment as n was increased. Is there any evidence for a bias
(systematic error) in the experimental set up? (Note: Just in case you’ve missed it so
far - the mean value alone provides no evidence for a bias (systematic error) it must be
considered with an appropriate error).
28
Experiment 5: Geometric optics, imaging with thin convex lenses
Safety
• The light source used is a relatively low power 40 W incandescent bulb. However, in
using lenses the light may be focused to produce high power densities with potential
to damage the eye. Therefore never look through lenses towards the light source.
• The light bulb is contained and shielded within a black housing which will become hot
after extended use. Therefore take care not to touch the housing.
• The lenses are made from glass and may break if dropped. If this occurs do not
attempt to clean up, instead call the demonstrator, supervisors or lab technician.
1. Simple Overview
This is a simple experiment designed to familiarise you with basic optical equipment and
a common sense approach to setting up optical systems. You will learn about some basic
properties of thin bi-convex spherical glass lenses, the key property of which is the focal
length of the lens. If parallel wave-fronts of light are incident on a thin lens, to a first
approximation the light is focussed by the lens to a point. This is known as the focal
length (f). Conversely, by symmetry, if a point source of light is placed at the focal point,
the lens converges the beam to be parallel. This is known as collimation/collimating.
This is sketched in figure 1. Parallel wavefronts can be approximated by light at a great
distance (for example light from the sun, or even a very distant light source). Point
sources can be simulated by small pin pricks in screens with lights behind them.
Figure 1. Simple ray trace view of the focal point of a lens.
The experiment makes use of an optical track that allows for the precise positioning and
fixing of optical components. This is essential for many optical experiments and
instruments, where the alignment of optical components can be critical. Experiments in
optics are different from most other types. This is due to the fact that an optical beam is
required to pass through or interact with a number of optical components that
consequently need to be carefully aligned. This is a skill that benefits from patience and
practice. This experiment provides a (relatively forgiving) introduction. As with any
optics experiment, avoid touching the optical surfaces as much as possible.
A simple tip to remember is to constantly look at the alignment of the lenses along the
track. They should be broadly in a straight line and the same height. If they are not
(heavily staggered, or up and down like a roller coaster) then your light path is equally
doglegged through the lenses, and in the extreme case you may even be picking up light
from some other (stray) source. This is not good, and probably means your first lens is
pointing the light significantly off the axis of the track.
29
Simple optics form the basis of cameras, microscopes, telescopes and the eye. The
techniques used are ubiquitous in scientific experiments, particularly in spectroscopy and
imaging (e.g. microscopes, telescopes etc).
Apparatus
1.5 m optical bench with Vernier scale, 40 W shielded incandescent light source, various
optical holders, lenses, filters, plates and screens.
2. Experiments
Reminder: Take care when handling optical components: The lenses are made from glass
and may break if dropped. If this occurs do not attempt to clean up, instead call the
demonstrator, supervisors or lab technician. In addition hold lenses at their edges and
above the benches when mounting into their holders.
Experiment 2.1 Collimated beams (and determination of focal length)
This section considers collimated light i.e. light whose rays are all parallel to the principal
axis. When such light (shown in figure 1) is incident on a converging lens it all passes
through the principal focus on the opposite side of the lens. Likewise rays emanating from
a principal focus emerge parallel to the principal axis (or collimated) from the lens. These
rays are central to understanding optical systems through ray diagrams. Collimated
beams, formed by placing objects at the focus of a lens, are often exploited in optical
instruments such as spectrometers.
“Auto-collimation”
The properties of collimated beams described above form the basis of a rapid method for
finding the focal length of a lens (this experiment) and for producing a collimated beam of
light (the next experiment).
• Place a pinhole (which will act as a point source of light or the �object’ in figure 2)
about 10-20cm from the lamp with its black side facing the lamp.
• Mount a plane (flat) mirror at approximately 50 cm with lens 1 between the pinhole
and the mirror.
The principle of the approach here is illustrated in Figure 2. The mirror reflects light back
into the lens and towards the pinhole. A sharply-focused image is produced immediately
alongside the pinhole only when the beam between the lens and the mirror is parallel and
the object distance is equal to the focal length. (Obviously if the pinhole is exactly centred
the image is formed coincident with the pinhole and you won’t see it – move the pinhole a
bit to check this hasn’t happened by chance).
Figure 2 Focal length determination by “auto-collimation”
•
Adjust the position of the lens in order to obtain a sharply focused image of the
pinhole next to the actual pinhole.
30
•
Find the focal length of lens 1.
Experiment 2.2 Measurements with a collimated beam
•
•
•
Remove the mirror and instead after lens 1 place a second lens holder and then a
screen. With no lens in the second holder it is likely that a number of images of the
pinhole will appear on the screen - this is a consequence of a combination of the light
source that consists of an extended and non-uniform filament and the larger hole now
being used. However, the light may still be considered to be collimated (the
separation of the images should not change as the screen is moved although the size of
each image will).
Place lens 2 in the holder and move the screen in order to determine its focal length, f.
To convince yourself that the light is collimated and the separation between the two
lenses does not matter, repeat this for the second lens at positions of 60cm and 90cm
on the optical bench (f should not change).
Repeat for lens 3.
Experiment 2.3 Radius of curvature of a lens (+ determination of refractive index)
There are a wide variety of experiments that can be performed to examine the properties
of lenses. The following (slightly quirky) example is included since it is a convenient
way of determining the radius of curvature of convex lenses and knowledge of this value
allows the refractive index of the material used to be determined.
The principal of the measurement is shown in figure 3. A source S of light (a pinhole
again) transmits lights onto a lens. However, although most light is transmitted some is
reflected (for an air/glass boundary ~5% can be reflected) enough to form a visible
“return” image alongside the source (see background information).
The condition for forming a return image (shown in figure 3) is a separation, u, between
source and lens such that following refraction at the first (left hand side) air/glass
boundary the light rays are incident normal/perpendicular to on the second (glass/air)
boundary. Then at the same time (i) the main, transmitted part of the beam forms a virtual
image at C and (ii) the reflected beam retraces its path back to and forms an image at the
source.
Here although use is made of the reflection calculations are based on the formation of a
virtual image (i.e. relating to light refracted through both interfaces). Since a virtual
image is formed at C, the sign convention dictates that v is negative, however C is at the
centre of curvature for the r.h.s. boundary and that magnitude of v is the radius of
curvature (for a thin lens).
31
Figure 3: Condition for forming a reflected image at the source (light rays are normally
incident on second boundary and retrace their path back to the source). Under these
conditions (and for a thin lens) the virtual image is at the centre of curvature of the rhs
boundary.
Perform the following for all three lenses:
• Place the pinhole (acting as source S) a suitable distance from the lamp.
• With the mirror removed position the lens to obtain a “return” image of the pinhole
close to the pinhole.
• Measure u and calculate the virtual image distance v using equation 4 found in the
background information at the end of the text (remember that v is negative).
• Find the radius of curvature of the other surface of the lens in a similar way.
• Use the fact that v is equal in magnitude to the radius of curvature of the appropriate
surface of the lens to calculate the refractive index of the lens material.
Experiment 2.4 Image formation (and determination of focal length)
This experiment examines the conditions for producing and the nature of an image of an
object (a cross hair on a screen) through a single bi-convex, thin, spherical glass lens.
• First measure the dimensions of the cross-hair on the clear slide (the horizontal will be
used to calculate the magnification of images produced).
• Accurately position the lamp at 0 cm and the clear slide with cross hair at 20 cm (this
is close enough for a reasonable throughput of light whilst avoiding images of the
filament in the bulb).
• Next position the screen at 110 cm (separation to slide = 110 - 20 = 90 cm) and lens 1
in its holder between the slide and the screen.
• Move the position of lens 1 and find the two positions at which an image of the cross
hair is clearly focused on the screen. Note the nature of the image compared to the
object. This is tricky. There really are two distances that produce images. Be patient
and work carefully to find the two positions.
• Adjust the vertical position of the lens and the lateral position of the slide and lens so
that the image is roughly in the centre of the screen for both positions (to roughly
align the system).
32
•
•
•
For screen positions starting at 110 cm and decreased in 5 cm steps find the two
focusing positions for the lens and the vertical height of the image (with errors) noting
your values in a suitable table. Finish the sequence by using smaller steps to find the
minimum slide/screen separation for which a well focused image is possible.
Plot a graph of 1/u versus 1/v and use the intercepts to determine the focal length of
the lens, f. What is the value of the gradient and is it as you would expect?
Compare the v/u and y/x values obtained, and comment on the conditions at the
minimum slide/screen separation (for example compare u, v and f and consider the
magnification).
3. Background Information
3.1 Geometric optics
Geometric optics (or ray optics) considers the propagation of light in terms of a single line
or narrow beam of light, through different media. It is a very useful way to consider
optical systems especially when imaging is involved.
Geometric optics is based on the consideration that light rays:
• propagate in a rectilinear (straight-line) path in homogeneous (uniform) medium
• change direction and/or may split in two (through refraction and reflection) at the
interface or boundary with a dissimilar medium (only two media are considered here:
glass and air).
Although powerful in understanding the geometric aspects of optical systems, such as
imaging and aberrations (faults in images) it does not account for effects such as
diffraction and interference.
3.2 The interface between two media: refractive index and Snell’s law
The two media of concern here are air and glass and the parameter that characterizes their
optical property as far as geometric optics (and lenses) is concerned is their refractive
index, n.
Refractive index, n relates to the speed of light in media and is defined
n=
speed of light in a vacuum
speed of light in a medium
[1]
By definition the refractive index of a perfect vacuum is unity (i.e. exactly one). The
refractive index bears a close relationship to relative permittivity, Оµr and can be
understood to result from the interaction between matter and light’s electric and magnetic
fields.
Light incident upon a boundary between media with different refractive indexes will be
reflected and transmitted. In addition, the transmitted light may be “refracted”, i.e. it
changes direction as described by Snell’s law.
For light travelling from air to glass (see figure 4) Snell’s law can be expressed as
sin Оё i n glass
=
= n glass
sin Оё t
nair
[2]
Where the angles are as defined in figure 4 and nair and nglass are the refractive indices of
air and glass respectively.
33
Оёi
Оёr
air
glass
Оёt
Figure 4. Behaviour of a light ray travelling from air (low n media) to glass (higher n
media). The light ray is partially reflected and transmitted. The transmitted ray changes
direction, (is refracted) at the interface according to Snell’s law (θi, θr and θt are the
angles if incidence, reflection and refraction of the light ray respectively). - Note that a
ray with an angle of incidence of 0o does not deviate at the boundary.
Material
Polycarbonate
Air
Glass
n
~1.58
~1.0003
1.48-1.85
Table 1. Some refractive index values
3.3 Lenses
A lens is an optical component that in transmitting light rays uses refraction (i.e. the
application of Snell’s law) to cause them to either converge or diverge. Lenses are
usually constructed out of glass or transparent plastics.
The lenses used here will be “thin”, glass bi-convex (converging) spherical lenses as
shown in figure 2 with its main characterizing features:
• The axis of symmetry of a lens is known as its “principal axis”. Lenses usually also
have a very good “axial symmetry”: the behaviour of the lens varies with distance
from the axis - but is independent of the direction from the axis.
• A “bi-convex” lens is one that bulges outwards both sides from its centre.
• The bulge is characterised by the radius of curvature of the left and right hand side
surfaces, r1 and r2 respectively.
• A “thin” lens is one whose thickness along its principal axis (d in figure 5) is much
smaller than its focal length, f, i.e. d << f. It is an approximation that permits simpler
equations to be used.
• A “spherical” lens indicates that the front and back faces can be considered to be part
of a sphere which has an associated radius (also known as its “radius of curvature”).
• Light rays parallel to principal axis and incident on the lens will, after transmission, all
pass through the “principal focus” of the lens on the opposite side (light can travel in
either direction so the reverse is also true and there are two “principal foci”). Figure 3
explicitly shows this.
• The distance from the optical centre, Oc of the lens to the principal foci is known as
the focal length, f of the lens.
34
•
Planes perpendicular to the principal axis and passing through the principal foci are
called “focal planes”.
r1
d
lens
r2
optical centre, Oc
principal axis
F
F
principal foci, F
focal length, f
Figure 5. Main features of a bi-convex lens.
3.4 Image formation, ray diagrams and sign conventions
Reading this page you are using a convex (converging) lens in your eye to form a “real
image” on your retina - it is real in the same sense as the image on a cinema screen is real.
In forming the image the light from a point on the page travels through all parts of the
lens. A consequence of this is that image formation can be understood by considering any
convenient rays of light as shown in figure 6.
object
1
x
2
F
image
F
3
y
v
u
Figure 6. Formation of a real “image” of an “object” as understood through ray tracing
(x and y are the heights of the object and image respectively and u and v are the distances
of the object and image from the optical centre respectively.
Three convenient rays of light (labelled 1, 2 and 3 in figure 6) are:
Ray 1. A ray parallel to the principal axis which after refraction passes through the
principal focus.
Ray 2. A ray passing largely undeviated through the optical centre.
Ray 3. A ray that passes through the principal focus on the object side of the lens and
therefore emerges from the lens parallel to the principal axis.
Any two rays of light are sufficient and most textbooks use rays 1 and 2.
In addition to “real images” in optics there is also the concept of “virtual images”. In this
case rays appear to diverge from a point on an object. This concept is more commonly
used with diverging lenses, is used in experiment 2.4, but its simplest example is a flat
mirror where the image of an object is perceived at twice the distance from the object to
the mirror.
In order to form equations that relate, for example, the focal length of a lens to the
distances of the object and the (real and/or virtual) image from the lens for all possible
situations (for example to include diverging as well as converging lenses) it is necessary
to adopt a “sign convention”. The convention specifies the algebraic signs that must be
35
given to the various lengths in the system. Different textbooks may employ different
conventions and therefore have slightly different equations (which is mildly annoying).
General “University physics” textbooks are not very explicit in the conventions they
employ, therefore the convention adopted here is that used in “Optics” by Hecht
(publisher Addison Wesley).
In this convention optical beams enter the system from the left and travel to the right (as
in figure 3). Using the symbols used in figures 2 and 3 the signs used are explained in
table 2 below.
Sign
Quantity
u
v
f
x
y
Magnification (m = x/y)
r
+
real object
real object
converging lens
erect object
erect image
erect image
boundary left of Oc
virtual object
virtual object
diverging lens
inverted object
inverted image
inverted image
boundary right of Oc
Table 2. Meanings associated with the signs of thin lens parameters
Using this convention and by considering “similar triangles” in figure 3 it can be shown
that:
y
v
the linear magnification
m= =в€’
[3]
x
u
and that
1 1 1
+ =
u v f
[4]
Equation 4 is known as the “thin lens equation” or the “Gaussian lens equation”.
Another useful equation, which relates the focal length, f to the radii of curvature, rl and
r2, of the surfaces of the (thin) lens and the refractive index, n, of the material from which
it is made is the lens maker’s equation:
пЈ®1
1
1пЈ№
= (n в€’ 1)пЈЇ в€’ пЈє
f
пЈ° r1 r 2 пЈ»
[5]
Note that for the bi-convex lens shown in figures 2 and 3 under this convention the first
radius is positive and the second is negative.
36
Experiment 6: Introduction to multi-meters and oscilloscopes
Safety: The cell used in this experiment is low voltage (~2 V) but capable of delivering
high currents if a low resistance circuit (e.g. wires or an ammeter) is connected between
its terminals. There is no danger directly from electricity here but with high currents,
components such as the wires can get very hot and it is possible to damage both these and
electrical meters. Take care to follow the written instructions and consult a demonstrator
if at all unsure.
Apparatus: 1x Fluke 21 and 1x Fluke 111 multi-meters, GW Instek GDS-1022
oscilloscope, Thandar TG 102 Function generator, 1x cyclon cell, 2x 4.7 MΩ resistors,
breadboard, jump leads suitable for bread board.
Outline
The purpose of this session is primarily to provide an introduction to instruments for the
generation and especially the measurement of dc and ac voltages, and to become familiar
with very basic circuit construction using standard breadboards. Most students will have
used multi-meters (without necessarily understanding how they work) but far fewer will
have used oscilloscopes. This is a structured training session so the experiments (such as
they are) have been chosen to illustrate characteristics of the instruments. Students should
ensure that they make experimental notes in their diary. Although none of it is
demanding, there is a lot to get through and students will need to work efficiently.
Concluding remarks will relate to the characteristics of the instruments used.
Experimental Skills
• Use of instruments for measuring ac and dc electrical circuits.
• Awareness of the importance of understanding the limitations of such meters.
• Simple circuit building: including use of coaxial leads and breadboards.
Wider Applications
• Oscilloscopes are widely used in teaching laboratories as measurement instruments
and in research labs as test instruments.
• As is examined here the addition of an instrument to an electrical circuit will perturb
(affect) that circuit: this is analogous to the perturbation of quantum mechanical
systems by measurements made upon them.
1. Introduction
1.1. Reminder: The Basics of Electricity
The term “electricity” usually refers to the flow or movement of charge, Q (units
coulomb, C). In man-made metallic electrical circuits it is negatively charged electrons
that move around to provide some useful function. Whenever there is a flow of charge
there is said to be an “electrical current”.
A good analogy is water flowing through pipes. The amount (volume or mass) of water
that has flowed past a point is analogous to charge; the rate at which water flows past a
point (volume or mass/second) is, similarly, termed a current.
For electricity the equation relating charge moved to current is
electricalcurrent, ‫ܫ‬ሺunitamperes, ‫ܣ‬ሻ =
37
charge, ܳሺunitcoulomb, ‫ܥ‬
timeሺunitsecond, ‫ݏ‬ሻ
Ьі
[1]
or
ܳ = ‫ݐܫ‬
‫ݐ‬
As with anything that moves, a push (force) is required to get it going. For water the
force is provided by a pressure difference between two points, in the case of electricity, a
potential difference (voltage). The flow of water or charge is limited by the resistance of
whatever it is flowing through. A slightly opened tap has a high resistance and so the
water flow is small, fully opened the resistance is much less and the flow is much larger.
Electrical resistance works in the same way and the relevant equation is described by
Ohm’s Law:
Or
‫=ܫ‬
Resistance, Ьґб€єunitohms, Я—б€» аµЊ
Or
ЬґаµЊ
voltage, Ьёб€єunitvolts, Ьёб€»
current, ‫ܫ‬
Ьё
‫ܫ‬
[2]
A difference between water and electricity flow is that water generally flows in one
direction whereas electricity is useful when it moves in one direction (known as “direct
current” or “d.c.”) but also if it is made to alternate in direction (“alternating current” or
“a.c.”). In dc circuits the direction of the current is governed by the sign of the applied
voltages (conventionally it flows from + to -). For some devices it is important to get this
right and components and wires are coloured as an aid to this. Conventionally red is
positive and black is negative. In ac circuits the voltage alternates +ve and –ve so colour
coding has no meaning.
1.2 Describing a.c. voltages
In this session the ac voltage used will have a sinusoidal waveform (see figure 1):
ܸ ൌ ܸ஺ ‫ ݐ߱݊݅ݏ‬ൌ ܸ஺ ‫݊݅ݏ‬2ߨ݂‫ݐ‬
[3]
where VA is the amplitude of the waveform, f is the frequency (Hz) and П‰ is the angular
frequency (radians per second). This is the same form as the mains supply, however
square and triangular waveforms are also common in the laboratory. The size of the
voltage is most obviously described by its amplitude, VA, however there are more
commonly used alternatives as shown in figure 1:
Figure 1. Sinusoidal waveform (V = VAsinωt) showing the alternative amplitudes (explained in the text) that may be
used: here VA = 1 V, Vpp = 2 V and Vrms = 1/в€љ2V = ~0.707 V.
38
The r.m.s. (root mean square) amplitude, Vrms, is used as it gives the same heating effect
as a steady direct current or voltage and so is useful and easy to use in calculations. Most
ac voltages are quoted as rms values (+digital multi meters give ac voltages as rms
values).
The difference between the maximum and minimum value is known as its peak to peak
amplitude, Vpp. Peak to peak amplitudes are often convenient to measure, especially
using oscilloscopes) and are an entirely acceptable way of describing signals.
ЬёаЇЈаЇЈ
= в€љ2ЬёаЇҐаЇ аЇ¦
2
For sine waves the relationship between the different amplitudes is given by:
Ьёа®є аµЊ
[4]
See “Principles of Physics” by Halliday and Resnick (Ed 9, section 31.10) for a
consideration of power in alternating current circuits.
1.3 Some (health and safety related) numbers:
• Mains electricity here is 230 V* ac (it alternates at 50 cycles per second or 50 Hz) and
the maximum current that can be delivered from a standard wall socket is 13 A ac.
This stuff is dangerous.
• Mobile phone or PC chargers might be 12 or 18 V dc and be capable of delivering a
current of 10’s of milli-amperes (10’s mA or 10’s x10-3 A). This isn’t dangerous.
• Rather more obscure – electrical signals in the eye can be up to ~200 µV (micro volt)
(~200x10-6 V). This definitely isn’t dangerous.
• Safety guidance: A rule of thumb used in our teaching laboratories is that voltages of
60 V DC or 25 V* AC or less are safe. Much higher voltages can be safe but it is then
necessary to consider whether dangerous currents can be delivered (because in the end
it�s current that kills not voltages).
* These are rms amplitudes!
2. Experimental
This training session starts by introducing multi-meters, before moving on to
oscilloscopes (and necessarily also function generators). The session is ended with a
couple of experiments to provide practice with the instruments and to illustrate some of
their limitations. Required information concerning the instruments is given as required:
fuller accounts may be found in the appendix of this lab book.
Important: remember to make a note of any measurements and their precision in your
diary. In addition be advised that error propagation calculations are not required as
part of this session.
2.1. Hand held digital multi-meters (DMM)
There are a wide variety of this type of meter (that may look different but are basically
similar), they are used extensively in domestic, industrial environments and are accurate
and precise enough to be entirely suitable for a wide range of applications, including
undergraduate teaching laboratories. Their main function is in measuring current and
voltage (ac or dc) and resistance.
Have a look at the multi-meters provided (a photo of a Fluke 111 is shown in figure 2):
there are three main areas to get to grips with: the three sockets; the selector dial, and the
display:
39
•
•
•
The sockets (terminals) – you use two of the three. The common (COM) is always
used, the other depends on what it is that you want to measure (I, V or R).
The selector – there’s more than you’ll need here. You will probably only need ac (~)
or dc (=) current (I) or voltage (V) and resistance (Ω).
The display – tells you the value and units of the parameter you are measuring. These
can come with prefixes to indicate multiples of the base SI unit.
Figure 2 A Fluke 111 and the main features of its front panel
2.1.1 Messing around with a pair of multi-meters
2.1.2 Multi-meter as an ohm (resistance) meter.
Set up the Fluke 111 multi-meter as an ohm meter with two leads in the appropriate
sockets. Then measure resistances in the following situations:
• To measure the resistance of your body hold the bare metal contacts of the leads one
in each hand (it is unlikely to be stable so make a note of the range together with any
observations on the behaviour).
• Connect the bare contacts together.
• Hold the leads with the contacts apart so that there is no electrical connection at all.
Equation 2 indicates that to determine a resistance of something it is necessary to know
both the voltage difference across the something and the current flowing through it. So to
make the measurements above the multi-meter has (somehow) generated a dc voltage,
measured the dc current (when there is one) and divided one by the other to obtain a
resistance value.
Note: A consequence of having to work this way is that resistance measurements with an
ohm meter should never be performed on a live circuit, i.e. one that already has voltages
within it. At best the meter will get confused, at worst the equipment may be damaged.
2.1.3 Multi-meter as a voltmeter
So, a digital multi-meter (DMM) operating as an ohm meter generates a voltage.
Therefore with a second DMM it ought to be possible to measure the voltage.
• Here again use the Fluke 111 multi-meter as an ohm meter and the Fluke 21 multi
meter as a dc voltmeter. Using two leads connect the two devices (using the
appropriate sockets).
40
•
•
The voltmeter indicates the voltage generated by the ohmmeter, whilst the ohm meter
measures the resistance of the voltmeter.
Use the values and equation 2 to calculate the current that must be flowing in this
circuit.
2.1.4 Multi-meter as an ammeter
In a similar fashion to the previous section, here the current generated by an ohm meter
will be measured directly by using a second meter as an ammeter. This is the only time
that current measurements will be made in this session.
• Use the Fluke 111 multi-meter as an ohm meter and the Fluke 21 multi meter as a dc
ammeter (because this meter can measure lower currents than the Fluke 111). Using
two leads connect the two devices (using the appropriate sockets).
• The ammeter indicates the current (in mA) generated by the ohmmeter, whilst the ohm
meter measures the resistance of the ammeter.
• Use the values and equation 2 to calculate the voltage that must be produced by the
ohm meter to generate this current. (It shouldn’t be a surprise that the voltage is a lot
less than before).
Summary so far:
• Multi meters can be used to measure various electrical properties.
• As a resistance (ohm) meter the multi-meter generates a voltage (and so a current) and
then works out R = V/I. Consequently it must not be used in live circuits.
• Voltmeters have high resistances (so as not to draw current).
• Ammeters have low resistances (so as not to drop voltage).
2.2 Introduction to using the oscilloscope (and signal generator)
Oscilloscopes are useful for examining signals that vary over time, i.e. their waveforms.
To see this ac signals from a signal generator will be examined. Signal generators
produce a time varying voltage signal of various shapes, the common ones of which are
sine, triangular, and square whose frequency and amplitude can be controlled.
(Note: a summary version of how to use the Oscilloscope can be found in background
notes).
2.2.1 Making electrical connections
Figure 3. Front panel of the GW Instek oscilloscope. The important features initially are shown
with circles (Power, signal input channel 1, Volts/div (y-axis), and time/div (x-axis).
41
We’ll be using one of the input channels so this simplifies the set up of the scope.
•
•
Use two coaxial leads both with 4mm termination.
Connect the first lead between the 50Ω output of the signal generator (BNC) and the
voltage input of either of the Fluke DMMs (set to operate as a voltmeter).
• Connect the second lead from the Fluke to the channel 1 input of the scope but be
careful to ensure that the green (earth) leads are connected together otherwise the
signal will be shorted out.
With this arrangement the two instruments receive exactly the same voltage signal.
Initially, only the function generator and oscilloscope will be used; comparisons with the
DMM will be made later.
2.2.2 Set up the signal generator (Thandar TG 102)
• Turn on the signal generator and set it to sine wave DC offset off (button out); ~50 Hz
(i.e. 0.5 Hz on dial and x100 on multiplier); output level minimum and 0 dB.
• We’ll start at ~50 Hz since this is mains supply frequency and we can reasonably
expect the DMM to give correct reading at this frequency.
2.2.3 Set up the oscilloscope (GW Instek GDS-1022 shown in figure 3)
• Turn on the oscilloscope and when the GW Instek banner has disappeared press
“Save/Recall” and then select “Default Setup”. (The default setup is the obvious
configuration from which to start and overcomes the issue that the oscilloscope
remembers its previous configuration which may or may not be appropriate or the
same for all students).
• Channel 1 and channel 2 are then positioned at the centre of the top and bottom halves
of the screen respectively.
• We’ll only be using channel 1; to cancel channel 2 press its button twice (once to
select, 2nd time to turn it off). Note: the channel 1 and 2 buttons are colour coded
yellow and blue respectively and this colour code is also used on the LCD display.
• Now press “Autoset”: with what is a reasonable signal level (>30 mV) and frequency
(>20 Hz) hopefully the scope has been able to choose suitable signal (y axis) and time
(x axis) ranges and triggering conditions* resulting in a stable sine wave on the
screen. If this isn’t seen please find a demonstrator.
*A trigger ensures that each update of the trace starts at the same point of the oscillating
cycle and consequently gives a stable display, otherwise the update would be with an
arbitrary phase shift, and you would end up with an unstable trace on the screen.
2.2.4 Finding your way around the LCD display
There is a lot of information around the periphery of the display, i.e. around the sinusoidal
trace seen in the centre.
To the left of the trace:
• A number (the channel number) and an arrow (►) showing the position of a 0 V
signal.
• The position of 0 V (and so the whole trace) can be altered by rotating the “vertical”
channel 1. When this is done the position of 0V on the screen (versus the central
horizontal axis) is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the display. Try this.
To the right:
• The broad blue column contains a changeable “menu” of choices and measurements.
This can be ignored for now.
• On the trace is an arrow (◄) indicating the triggering voltage. Triggering is central to
the operation of oscilloscopes and so will be considered here.
42
To understand the general principles simply investigate - by rotating the Trigger level
knob (on the right of the panel) clockwise and anticlockwise slightly about its original
position. Observe that:
(i)
the arrow (в—„) indicating the trigger voltage moves up and down on the right of
the display
(ii)
a “Trigger level = xxx mV” appears in the bottom left of the screen
(iii) the waveform moves to the left and right.
What’s happening is that the oscilloscope displays one trace and then almost immediately
replaces it with another. The reason the trace appears stable on the screen is that each
trace is made to start in the same place, i.e. it is triggered under the same conditions. In
fact, with this digital scope the trigger point is in the centre of the x axis on the screen.
Adjusting the trigger level changes the voltage at this position. Have another play with
the trigger voltage if you want to.
Finally, adjust the trigger voltage until it goes out of the range of the oscillating signal.
Once this happens the system cannot trigger and the screen simply updates randomly
leading to an unstable trace.
Underneath the trace:
• On the LHS the scales for the two channels are given. These numbers give the
voltage corresponding to the vertical side of a (~1 cm) square (or volts per division).
Note that the active channel is denoted by a number on a coloured background whereas
the inactive channel is a number on a dark background.
•
•
•
Next along is the “horizontal status”: “M” is for Main mode (of the scope) and the
time corresponds to a ~1cm square (or time per division).
On the right, both with a green background are a “T” (for Trigger) followed by the
triggering conditions: in this case an edge (i.e. a changing signal) on the channel 1
waveform, in fact here a rising edge (i.e. the signal must be increasing with time).
Below this is an “f” (for frequency) followed by a value.
The frequency value is hopefully ~50 Hz. At this point make a note of the value
measured and compare it with the frequency on the function generator. The
oscilloscope is very good at measuring frequency oscilloscope and is much more
reliable than the function generator.
Above the trace:
• The “▼” symbol above the centre of the screen and the symbols above it relate to the
horizontal position of the waveform. This can be altered by rotating the “horizontal”
knob. Try it.
• To the right in green the “Trig’d ●” indicates that a signal is being triggered (on taking
the trigger voltage out of the range of the signal this changes to “auto ●/o” meaning
that the screen is updated regardless of the trigger conditions).
Make a note of the y axis volts per division and x-axis time per division chosen by the
scope using its “autoset”. Reminder: “autoset” decides on triggering, y and x axis ranges
but you can subsequently alter these.
Try varying the y axis volts/div and the x-axis time/div in order to determine the available
ranges.
43
2.2.5 How to measure signals with the oscilloscope
Oscilloscopes aren’t precise measurement instruments although they are good enough for
most UG experiments. An advantage of a digital scope over older analogue scopes is that
since signals are digitised it is easy to perform mathematical manipulations on them, i.e.
they will do some (and sometimes all) of the work for you.
Here the ~50 Hz signal set up earlier will be measured.
Using “Cursor” (to do some of the work)
• Press “Cursor” and two vertical lines appear in the screen that are used to give 2
horizontal positions (X1 and X2).
• Or, by pressing the X↔Y function key accesses 2 vertical positions (Y1 and Y2).
• The position of the cursors is controlled by the “Variable” knob (at top left).
• With the function key X1X2 (Y1Y2) selected the separation of the cursors is fixed.
• To control them individually select X1 (Y1) or X2 (Y2).
Take measurements of: the amplitude, the peak to peak amplitude (i.e. from maximum to
minimum) and the period (and so the frequency).
Note that if the cursors are positioned one period (T) apart the scope calculates the
frequency (f = 1/T) – and since averaging over one period is poor experimental practice be
aware that this really is a rough measurement.
Using “Measure” (to do all of the work)
• Press the “Measure” menu key and the peak to peak voltages (Vpp), the average
voltage (Vavg)), the frequency (f) appear directly in the blue column (along with other
stuff that will be ignored here).
Record the measurements and briefly compare with those obtained using the cursors.
3. Electrical measurements with multi meters and scopes
The session will finish off by using the meters. The two experiments have been chosen to
illustrate limitations with the meters and, as a result, the care and understanding required
when using them. The second involves making a simple circuit on a “breadboard”,
something that few first year students will have come across before.
3.1. Comparing ac voltage measurements made by an oscilloscope and a DMM
As mentioned previously multi-meters are likely to be designed to measure 50 Hz
(supply) voltages: which begs the question what is their reliable frequency range?
Note: This experiment uses the same circuit arrangement as above (as set up in $2.2.1).
The DMM may have turned itself off and may need to be turned off and on again.
•
•
•
Start by confirming that the voltages measured by the two instruments agree at ~50
Hz. Reminder: ac voltmeters give rms values, whereas measurements from
oscilloscopes will be amplitudes or peak to peak amplitudes – see equation 4.
Now repeat the measurements as a function of frequency in order to determine the
range is which the multi-meter can be trusted: see suggested data table below.
Examine the range 10 – 105 Hz, start by increasing the frequency a decade (factor of
10) at a time, before making finer adjustments in areas of interest (a total of 10 points
should be sufficient).
Table Suggested format of data table
Frequency, f/Hz
log10f
DMM /V
44
Scope Vpp /V
Vpp/2в€љ2 /V
•
•
Plot a graph of DMM voltage versus log10f.
Be clear on the reliable frequency range for the multi meter and the criteria used in
deciding.
3.2 A potential divider circuit measured by a multi meter
Ideally the introduction/inclusion of a meter into any circuit will not (significantly) affect
the circuit. If it does the meter reading is potentially misleading. This section examines
the consequences for voltage measurements of the large but finite impedance of an
instrument.
Although this experiment could be performed either ac or dc with an oscilloscope we’ll
revert to dc measurements with a multi meter.
The circuit to be measured shown in figure 4 is a simple voltage dividing circuit.
Assuming that there is no meter attached or that such a meter does not affect the
measurement it can be understood by considering that the current through the two
resistors must be the same and so
‫ܫ‬ൌ
ܸଵ ܸଶ
аµЊ
ܴଵ ܴଶ
ܸଵ Rଵ
аµЊ
Vଶ ܴଶ
or
[5]
where R1 and R2 are the two resistors and V1 and V2 are the voltages across them.
Alternatively
ܸ௖�௟௟ ൌ ܸଵ ൅ ܸଶ ൌ ‫ܴܫ‬ଵ ൅ ‫ܴܫ‬ଶ ൌ ‫ܫ‬ሺܴଵ ൅ ܴଶ ሻ
[6]
Figure 4 Circuit arrangement for a potential divider. Ideally, adding the meter to probe the circuit will not affect the
voltages across each resistor.
The circuit will be constructed on a bread board (or prototype board). Before making the
resistor circuit spend no more than 5 minutes doing the following in order to understand
its electrical connections (see the “background notes” for a description of these boards):
•
•
Connect (thin) jump leads to 2 of the 4 mm posts ensuring that some bare wire
protrudes from the post: a common cause of poor connections is pinching down on the
wires’ insulation.
Connect the DMM as an ohmmeter to the same 2 posts.
45
•
•
Touch the bare, free ends of the leads together and confirm that you have a short using
the meter.
Now plug the free ends of the leads into different parts of the perforated block to
investigate which points are connected and not connected. (The figure in the
background notes section indicates how rows are connected so there is no need to
make diary notes on this).
Now make up the series circuit using the 2 nominally identical high value resistors (both ~
4.7 MΩ) provided: this will comprise of the 2 resistors on 3 rows and wires from the each
row to all 3 of the 4mm posts.
• Before connecting the cell use the 4 mm posts and a DMM as an ohmmeter to
measure and note the value of both of the resistors used.
• Change the DMM to act as a dc voltmeter and connect the cell across both resistors.
• Connect the voltmeter first across both resistors (and note the cell voltage) then across
one of them (again noting the voltage).
If the two resistors are identical (R1 = R2) this potential across one resistor should be half
that of the cell voltage, that it isn’t results from the finite resistance of the voltmeter (RV).
The parallel combination of R1 and RV has an overall resistance of Rov:
1
1
1
аµЊ
аµ…
ܴ௢௩ ܴଵ ܴ௏
[7]
resulting in a decrease in the voltage across the R1/RV combination.
•
•
Use the measured voltages to calculate a value for RV (in equations 5 and 6 R1 must be
replaced by Rov)
Compare RV with the measurement obtained earlier in Section 2.1.2.
Note:
• As the resistance of the voltmeter/multi-meter becomes significantly greater than that
of the circuit the measurement becomes less affected.
• Oscilloscopes in general have lower resistances than multi-meters (try measuring it
with the multi-meter and/or check out the front panel of the scope).
46
Experiment 7: Computer Data Acquisition (and RC Circuits)
Use of computers in this experiment
Due to multiple users of these computers, do not save copies of your work onto the PC
hard-drive. Ensure that you obtain hard copies of your data as you go along, by using the
printer.
Outline
Although most experiments in the first year laboratory involve taking measurements by
hand, the use of data-loggers, often run by computers, is ubiquitous at research level.
This experiment demonstrates both the advantages and potential pitfalls when one uses a
computer to digitally capture an oscillating (analogue) voltage produced by a signal
generator. “Under sampling” of the signal, which leads to “aliasing” is revealed by use of
Fourier transformations of the data to reveal the frequency components. Finally the
system is used to measure the discharge of a resistance-capacitor (RC) circuit and
determine its “time constant”.
Experimental skills
• Basic use of data loggers and signal generators.
• Awareness of digital signal processing effects: (under) sampling leading to aliasing.
• Use of analysis functions built into software.
• A very basic introduction to the use of Fourier transformations in the analysis of
periodic functions.
• Very simple wiring (of an RC circuit).
Wider Applications
• Computer based data acquisition and associated signal processing is everywhere!
• Fourier transforms are not restricted in signal processing/analysis but appear in many
fields of physics. For example, undergraduates are often taught the mathematics of
Fourier transforms in optics courses. Closely related, and performed in 1st year
laboratory, x-ray diffraction patterns can be considered to represent the 3D Fourier
transform of crystal lattices. You will not be taught the maths of Fourier theory yet,
but an appreciation of its uses will be advantageous in future discussions.
• RC circuits are widely used for example to modify analogue voltage signals. A later
experiment considers their use in rectifying circuits which convert ac voltages to dc the RC component appears in the final “smoothing” of the signal.
1. Introduction
Note: A data logger will be taken to be a device that records measurements to file usually
as a function of time. Computer systems may also control an experiment by both setting
an independent variable and measuring a dependent variable, but can equally act simply
as a data logger.
Performing experiments and taking data automatically via use of data loggers or computer
controlled equipment is almost universal at research level. The advantages of computers
are most obvious in the cases where there are large amounts of data to be handled
(acquired, processed and stored) and/or where values change at a high rate. However,
there are significant disadvantages. A major one is in the perception by many people that
47
all errors disappear when measurements are made by computers - they most definitely do
not! This is perhaps borne by the inscrutability of computers - it can very difficult to
figure out what they are doing and how they arrive at their answers.
The above limitations would be acceptable if our undergraduate courses were aimed at
training operators, but they are not. As a scientist it is necessary to understand and trust
the results of experiments and to do this it is necessary to understand the equipment and
their associated limitations.
Apparatus
PC, Pocket CASSY with U,I sensors, Signal generator, Cyclon cell, 5000ВµF capacitor, 20
kΩ resistor.
1.1 Data acquisition
Systems used to acquiring data in the form of software files can superficially come in
many forms but ultimately are all very similar. Whilst not attempting to be exhaustive,
systems have the following features:
• Starting with the parameter to be measured; this may come in many different forms,
e.g. temperature, displacement speed, light intensity etc etc. However, in all cases a
“transducer” is used to measure the parameter and convert it with a well known
conversion factor, into a voltage.
• A voltage from a transducer that varies continuously with time is known as an
analogue signal.
• This analogue signal must be converted to a digital signal in order to be read by and
make sense to a computer and this is achieved by an analogue to digital converter
(A→D converter).
• A→D converters output values with a fixed number, n of bits and consequently have a
fixed resolution. The CASSY system uses a 12 bit converter and so the signal for a
particular range is split into 2n values. A voltage range of +/-3 V therefore has a
resolution of 6/212 ~ 1.46 mV (this is what produces steps in data).
• The time axis too will be subject to limitations. Data is collected or “sampled” at set
time intervals. Acquisition systems can be limited by the minimum time interval
allowed and/or by the maximum number of points that can taken. Here a maximum of
16000 points can be collected with a minimum sampling interval of 100 Вµs
1.2 Controlling experiments
In the set up used in this experiment the computer is simply involved in passively taking
data, i.e. in data logging. However, the CASSY system can also control experiments, for
example by setting a variable and measuring a dependent variable. There are a number of
experiments run under the CASSY system in the second year laboratories.
1.3 Sampling data
The importance of the sampling interval is illustrated in Figure 1 in which an analogue
sinusoidal signal is sampled at an interval that is slightly less than the period of
oscillation.
Sampled in this way the data would appear on a computer screen as a succession of points
that bear no relation to the original data. Clearly a good representation of the original data
48
simply requires a large (or sufficient) number of points per period of oscillation - or
equivalently a sample frequency much higher than the signal frequency.
1.5
signal
1
0.5
0
-0.5
-1
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
1
time /s
Figure 1. A sinusoidal signal with a period of 0.5 s (frequency of 2 Hz) sampled (indicated by dots) at a sampling
interval of ~0.32 s (sampling frequency, fsample ~3.1 Hz).
Of interest in this experiment is in identifying the sampling frequency sufficient to allow
the extraction of meaningful information and what happens when the sampling frequency
is insufficient, i.e. the signal is “under sampled”.
It turns out that to extract the frequency of a signal (see next section) the minimum
requirement is a sampling frequency twice the signal frequency - a useful “rule of
thumb” for experimentalists. However, to obtain an accurate signal shape much higher
sampling frequencies are required.
1.4 Fourier transforms and aliasing
Fourier transforms (FTs) will be used as a “black-box” signal processing/analysis tool in
this experiment. The mathematics of how they work will come later in taught modules.
This section only aims to give an introduction. The term “Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)”
will be seen and this refers to how the transform is performed, here Fourier and Fast
Fourier Transforms will be taken to mean the same thing.
In Figure 8.1 the signal is displayed in the “time (t) domain”, i.e. the signal is plotted
against time on the x-axis. However, it is also possible to represent the signal in the
“frequency (1/t or f) domain” i.e. the x-axis is in terms of frequency. Since the signal in
figure 1 is composed of a function oscillating with a single frequency when represented in
the frequency domain it would be expected to be a single peak at this frequency. “Fourier
transform” is the term used to describe both the process of converting data between
domains and the new representation of the data.
The power of FTs in signal processing arises from its ability to take a complicated signal
made by the sum of a range of frequencies and split them into its components. For
example, taking a musical chord, a FT would display the notes that make it up.
A particular effect of under-sampling a signal that will be examined using FTs is that of
aliasing. Aliasing generally refers to effects that result in different signals becoming
indistinguishable, i.e. “aliases” of one another.
49
2. Experiment
The practice of computer data acquisition is addressed initially by examining the
importance of the sampling frequency in measuring sinusoidal signals from a signal
generator, aided by the use of Fourier transforms. This is followed by a study of the
discharge of a capacitor through a resistor
2.1 Computer and software
• If not already started, turn on the computer. As the computer is not networked, log on
using the “student” account (no password required).
• To start the CASSY software, from the “start” button click on “programs”, “CASSY
Lab” and then “CASSY Lab” again.
• You should now see the “Settings” window. An icon representing the “pocket
CASSY” interface box and its U, I sensor should be visible. It is from here that the
settings associated with the acquisition and display of data are set.
• Since we want to use the U input, which is on the left hand side of the sensor, leftclick on this part of the icon. Three windows will now appear: “sensor input settings”,
“measuring parameters” and “voltage U1”. The changes that need to be made from
the default settings are described below:
sensor input settings - the default measuring range is +/- 10V, this needs to be changed to
+/-3V This range is large enough to cope with the signal generator output and battery
voltage (~2 V) and has the required (millivolt) precision.
measuring parameters - the “measuring interval” (dt), the time between points and the
“number” of points (n) are set in this window. The product of these two values (n.dt)
gives the total measuring time and this value is also displayed. Note: that if n is not
specified the system will collect data until instructed to stop and the graph will keep
resetting the time axis to accommodate the readings.
voltage U1 - simply gives a reading of the voltage value, both as a digital value and a
pointer.
2.2 Examination of sinusoidal waveforms
Methodology
Setting up for a measurement
• Connect the signal generator, from the 50Ω output, across the “U” input connections
of the small CASSY interface box.
• A signal generator amplitude of ~1 V and zero dc offset is required. This is
conveniently achieved by: selecting a square wave from the signal generator (SG);
setting a frequency fSG ~ 5Hz, making sure DC offset is turned off (button out), then
adjusting the output level and observing the pointer.
• Select a sinusoidal output on the signal generator.
• Before acquiring data. In the “measuring parameters” window (if you can’t see this
click the “toolbox” icon) set measuring interval as dt = 10 ms (fsample = 100 Hz) and n
= 250 (measuring time 2.5s). These parameters will remain unchanged for the
following examination of sinusoidal waveforms.
• Click the “stopwatch” icon to start taking measurements. Right click on the y axis of
the displayed graph and choose an appropriate scale. To take another set of data, click
on the clock icon again, collection will start as soon as save data?: “no” is clicked (and
yes this is slightly quirky).
50
Survey measurements at 5, 20 and 100 Hz
• Qualitatively describe the recorded fSG = 5 Hz signal (20 measurements per cycle) are there sufficient samples for the recorded data to be a good representation of a
sinusoidal waveform of constant amplitude and frequency?
• Repeat for fSG = 20 Hz (5 measurements per cycle) and 100 Hz (1 per cycle) signals.
• Print out the graph (not the data table) for the final frequency, fSG = 100 Hz.
The above should have made the point that data acquisition can go wrong, the next task is
to examine what is happening more closely.
Quantitative frequency measurements (fSG =10-100 Hz)
• Acquire data at a frequency of fSG =10 Hz.
• As accurately as possible, determine the period and so the frequency of the signal
from the graph, fgraph, (right click on the graph and “display coordinates” of the crosshair”). Note from here-on measurements are being made so errors are required.
(Fast) Fourier Transforms will now be introduced. To set these up:
• Click on the toolbox icon and select “Parameter/Formula/FFT”.
• Click on the “New Quantity” button and select “Fast Fourier Transform” half way
down the settings box.
• A “Frequency spectrum” tab should have appeared above the data table on the left of
the screen, click on this tab to show the FT. Since the signal is a single frequency a
single peak should have appeared.
• Measure this frequency, fFT and compare with fSG and fgraph.
For the first measurement performed the frequency will be determined by examining both
the V(t) data and its FT. Subsequently only the FT method will be used.
• Returning to 10 Hz, acquire a measurement. From the V(t) data determine the period
and so the frequency (with an estimate of its error).
• Look at the Fourier transform (frequency spectrum). As described above there should
be a single peak corresponding to the signal frequency (fFT). Use the cursors to find
the frequency (with an estimate of its error).
• Compare the three frequencies: as set on signal generator (fSG), measured from signal
versus time graph (ft), measured from FT (fFT).
• Now acquire data for fSG = 20 to 100 Hz in 10 Hz steps. Look at and briefly describe
the Vs(t) data at each frequency but only use the FT to measure the frequency, noting
your values in a table.
• Plot a graph of fFT/fSG versus fSG.
• Comment on the meaning of this graph (e.g. the “rule of thumb” implies that fFT = fSG
for fsample ≥ 2fSG should be observed, what is the agreement between fFT and fSG at low
fSG?).
Note that as a result of the sampling frequency a signal may have a different, lower
(measured) frequency assigned to it; it therefore has an “alias”.
2.3 Measurement of the discharge of a capacitor through a resistor.
This is a convenient experiment to perform both as an example of computer data
acquisition and as preparation for later experiments with electrical circuits.
Resistor-capacitor circuits (a reminder)
A capacitor is a device which may store electrical charge. Equal positive, +Q, and
negative, -Q, charges are held on conductors inside the capacitor, so that there is overall
51
charge neutrality. The greater the charge Q that is stored in the capacitor, the greater is the
potential difference V between its two terminals:
V =Q/C
[1]
where the constant C is called the capacitance of the capacitor.
By connecting a capacitor across a battery, charge will flow onto the conducting plates of
the capacitor until the voltage across the capacitor equals that across the battery, so
preventing any further charge flow. A schematic of the circuit used in this experiment is
shown in Figure 2. The rate at which the capacitor charges depends on the battery voltage
V0, the capacitance C, and the resistance R of the circuit.
R
C
Figure 2: Circuit arrangement
The voltage across the capacitor, charging from 0 V and starting at t = 0 s is given by the
equation
V = V0 ( 1 в€’ e в€’ t / RC )
[2]
A charged capacitor may be discharged by connecting a wire across its terminals, and the
rate of discharge again depends on V, C and the resistance R. The voltage across the
capacitor, discharging from V0 and starting at t = 0 s is given by the equation:
V = V0e в€’ t / RC
[3]
The quantity RC must have the dimensions of time if equations [1] and [2] are to be
correct. The product RC is known as the "time constant" of the circuit, the higher the RC
the slower the circuit charges and discharges.
In the experiment the charging of a capacitor will be used to determine suitable
parameters for the CASSY system, but only the discharge of the capacitor will be
analysed. Equation [3] for the capacitor discharge may be written by taking natural logs
as:
ln(V ) = ln V0 в€’ t / RC
[4]
Thus either C or R can be determined graphically if the other quantity is known. (П„ is
known as the time constant and gives us a measure of the rate of charging of a particular
RC combination.)
Experimental apparatus and technique
• Be very careful to ensure that you do not short circuit either the battery or the
(charged) capacitor; this can result in the flow of very large currents.
• You are provided with capacitors and resistors whose values have a quoted tolerance
of В±10% and В±5% respectively.
52
•
The 5000µF capacitor and 20kΩ resistor will be measured. For this combination
calculate the expected time constant, П„ = CR.
Initial measurements
• Before making up the circuit in Figure 8.2, use the system to measure the e.m.f. of the
battery.
• In the same way check that the capacitor is fully discharged. If it isn’t connect it to a
1 kΩ resistor until it is fully discharged.
• Without making the connection to the battery, set up the circuit in Figure 2 with the
data logger connected across the capacitance.
• With the measuring (sample) interval still set to 100 ms and the number of points not
specified, start taking data then make the connection to the battery. Whilst data is
being taken: by right clicking on the y-axis set a suitable scale (the x (time) axis
should re-scale itself).
• With a limit of 125* on the number of data points decide on suitable measuring
interval and time to acquire the discharge data. Ensure the capacitor is fully charged
before acquiring these data.
* The data will be exported to EXCEL and 100 points is more convenient than thousands.
Measuring the capacitor discharge
• Set the measurement parameters determined above.
• When ready, start data acquisition then start the discharge by removing both
connections from the battery (to remove it entirely from the circuit) before shorting
them together.
• Print out the graph, but do not print out the table.
Analysing the data
As is often the case, although there are a lot of analysis functions built into the data
acquisition software, they do not necessarily the best tools to use. Here, although the
software will find the logarithm of data it only uses log10 whereas equation [4] requires
loge. Although the conversion is not difficult it is easier and more instructive to export the
data. (Another good reason to export data is that the graphs produced by CASSY are not
of good enough quality for formal reports.)
• Open EXCEL
• Right click on the data table and copy/paste it to EXCEL.
• Use the graph function on EXCEL to make an appropriate graph in order to determine
the time constant (RC).
• There is now a problem. Although EXCEL will give a quality of fit number it does
not give an error; and for any value determined in an experiment to have meaning
there must be an associated error.
• To determine errors print out the graph and do it by hand in the usual way.
• Compare the time constant and V0 values with expectations.
• Use a multi-meter to determine an accurate resistance and use this to calculate the best
value for the capacitance. Within tolerance, are your values in agreement with those
quoted?
53
Experiment 8: Radioactivity, counting statistics and half lives.
Important Safety Information
For this experiment you must receive training and your risk assessment must be checked
by your demonstrator before you proceed with practical work.
Two radioactive sources are provided. These are both sealed to minimise the risk of
leakage. When using radioactive materials, exposure should be minimised by:
1. limiting the amount of time exposed to the source;
2. maintaining a reasonable distance from the source;
3. washing your hands immediately after performing the experiment and certainly before
consuming food and drink;
In addition the Pa generator must always be used over the drip tray provided.
General Introduction
You will perform some basic experiments in the measurement of radioactivity using
standard pieces of equipment for detection of radioactive sources. The (effectively)
constant radioactivity of a uranium oxide source is used to determine the correct operating
voltage for a Geiger Muller (GM) tube. The GM tube is then used to perform two
experiments: (i) measurement of background radiation and its analysis in terms of Poisson
statistics, (ii) measurement of the (short) half-life of protactinium 234 (Pa234), an element
in the decay series of uranium 238.
Aims and experimental skills
• Safe handling of mildly radioactive material.
• Setting up and use of Geiger Muller detectors.
• Analysis of “counting experiment” data using Poisson statistics.
• Determination of half-life values.
1. Experiment
This experiment consists of three parts. In part 1 the operating characteristics of your
Geiger-Muller (GM) detector are investigated; in part 2 background radiation is measured
and analysed; in the final part, the half life of Protactinium234 is measured.
1.1 Setting up the detector
Note: This section is concerned with setting the detector up for later measurements. Refer
to Background section 2.5)
• First turn the counter on with the anode voltage set to 400 V to let it warm up for ~5
minutes.
• Use the warming up period to understanding how to operate the counter: Set it to
“counting” and “start”. The unit should then display the cumulative counts. These
counts can be zeroed using the “reset” button.
• Towards the end on the warm up procedure measure the background counts
accumulated over a 10 s period - there should be something like 5 to 10 counts if the
detector is working properly.
Now set the GM detector voltage to a minimum and place the UO2 ( "lollipop" ) close to
the detector window. Slowly increase the voltage until counting starts. This is the starting
potential. Record this voltage and count for one minute to give the count rate in counts per
54
minute. Increase the voltage and count for one minute. Repeat this procedure until the
maximum voltage available is applied. (This voltage will be less than that producing onset
of continuous discharge.) Plot the characteristics. Decide on the optimum voltage at
which to operate the GM detector. (See section
1.2 Background radiation (+Poisson statistics)
Due to the different sensitivities to different particles the measurement of background
radiation by a Geiger Muller tube is not straightforward. However, comparative studies
are possible and here the background detection rate is convenient for investigating the
statistics of counting.
Measuring background radiation
Refer to Background section 2.2. Poisson statistics involve counting events in defined
time periods. Here the experiment involves noting the total count every 5 s for a period of
360 s - do not reset the counter every 5 s. This is quite intense so draw up a suitable table
in advance that can be filled in during data collection.
•
Perform the data collection (following which note any relevant observations).
Analysis using Poisson statistics
The measured value required here (x in equation 2 in Background 2.2) is counts/time
interval and will be an integer. The data collection methodology indicates that the
smallest time interval that can be used is 5 s, however it is instructive to perform the
analysis for both 5 s and 10 s intervals. (There is potential for confusion here so diary
entries should be clear).
Data distributions
• Tabulate the counts for each 5 s (and 10 s) time interval (x) and their frequency (f(x)).
• Plot histograms (f(x) versus x) for both intervals, i.e. use separate plots.
• Determine the mean counts/time interval and the number of data points for the two
intervals. Use these to determine “expected” Poisson distributions using equation 2*,
plot the points on the same graphs as the experimental data. Is the total noumber of
timing intervals the same for both distributions? Why does this matter?
• How do your results compare with the theoretical Poisson distribution?
• What is the signal: noise ratio in both cases?
* Important note: equation 2 represents a normalised distribution.
Remember to take account of your measured mean background rate in the proceeding
measurements. Explain why you do this.
1.3 The half-life of Pa234
This Generator is supplied in a sealed translucent container which is virtually chemically
inert, and under normal circumstances is leak proof. For storage, the generator is packed
in an outer container.
Whilst in use the generator should be placed upside down, and after the experiment, the
generator must be returned to its protective beaker. When not in use the generator must be
stored with the plastic cap uppermost.
Check your risk assessment and especially remember to use the disposable gloves and
perform the experiment over plastic drip tray.
55
Figure 1. Arrangement of source and detector
•
•
•
•
•
Remove the flask from the box. Shake the flask while holding it above the drip tray
for a short period of time (10 second will be enough) until the contents have
completely mixed.
Replace the source upside down as shown in figure 1 and record the number of counts
per unit time. The easiest way to do this is to record the total number of counts (every
30 seconds) and work out the count rate afterwards. Continue until the count rate is
roughly constant, i.e. for approximately 20 minutes.
Plot a graph of count rate versus time. Remember to take background counts into
consideration. Comment on the graph obtained.
Finally, process your results to find the half-life of Protactinium-234. The half
life can be found from the graph by measuring the time taken for the count rate (of
Pa234) to fall by a half. If the count rate decreases exponentially to zero this task is
easy, if not then you will have to decide which is the most sensible approach and
explain what you decided and why. What is the most accurate graphical method to
use to find T1/2 and why? How do you think the signal to noise ratio changes
throughout the experiment?
Repeat the experiment if there is time to do so.
2. Background information
Radioactive decay is the process by which unstable atomic nuclei lose energy. In this
process particles of radiation are emitted, the three main types being alpha (He nuclei),
beta (electrons) and gamma (photons). Since the energy involved in nuclear processes is
high, the radiation is generally ionising. This property is exploited in the design of
detectors of radiation but is also responsible for the danger associated with radioactive
materials.
The discovery of radioactive materials, by Henri Becquerel in 1896, lead to great
advances in nuclear and other branches of physics. In one strand, it was realized that
nuclei could not only break up (fission) but also join together (fusion) and that the fusion
process was responsible to the power output of the Sun and the stars. This solved one of
the great mysteries of science at the time - that power output based on gravitational forces
implied a much shorter age for the Sun than that implied by the evidence of geology and
evolution.
56
2.1 The mathematics of radioactive decay
It was realized early on that the radioactive decay of nuclei is a “stochastic” or random
process, i.e. it is not possible to predict exactly when a nucleus would decay, instead, only
a probability of it decaying can be found. Following from this the rate of disintegration of
a given nuclide is directly proportional to the number of nuclei N of that nuclide present at
that time:
dN
= в€’О»N
[1]
dt
where О» is the decay constant. However, rather than deal with 'probability of decay per
second', it is more usual to describe the rate of decay of a radioactive material by its
characteristic half-life. This is defined as the average time T1/2 it would take for half the
number of nuclei in the material to decay, or alternatively and as will be used as part of
this experiment, for the decay rate to fall to one half of its original value.
2.2 The statistics of radioactive decay (Poisson statistics)
Poisson distribution
The measurement of radioactivity is a counting experiment; a detector counts the number
of discrete events occurring in a fixed time interval. Very often with this type of
experiment the data takes the form of a “Poisson distribution”. This is the second type of
statistical data distribution examined in the first year laboratory, the other (Gaussian
distribution) is investigated in Experiment 4.
The Poisson distribution is the limiting case of a “binomial distribution” when the number
of possible events is very large and the probability of any one event is very small. The
normalised distribution is given by
Вµ x eв€’Вµ
P(x) =
[2]
x!
where P(x) is the probability of obtaining a value x, when the mean value is Вµ. The
standard deviation for a Poisson distribution relates to the mean value and is given by Пѓ(x)
= Вµ . This distribution is unlike the normal or Gaussian distribution in that it becomes
highly asymmetrical as the mean value approaches zero.
Counting experiments: the “signal to noise” ratio
In all counting experiments*, the “quality” of the data is expected to “improve” with
increasing counting time and counts. This can be understood as follows: the mean
number of counts in the experiment, µ, is the “signal” whilst statistical variations in this
signal are represented by the standard deviation σ(x) and can be thought of as “noise”.
In Poisson statistics Пѓ(x) = Вµ therefore the signal/noise = Вµ / Вµ = Вµ , i.e. the ratio
increases with the square root of the number of counts. This is an often quoted and very
important finding for understanding and designing experiments.
Put another way, if in a particular counting period an average of N counts are obtained,
the associated standard deviation is в€љN (ignoring any errors introduced by timing
uncertainties, etc). Clearly, the larger N the more precise the final result. For a given
source and geometrical arrangement, however, N can be increased only by counting for
longer periods of time.
* Counting experiments are wide ranging. For physicists, counting photons to acquire a
spectrum (such as that emitted by a star) is a relatively common task that comes in this
category but even the number of letters sent by Einstein in set intervals has been analysed
in this way.
57
2.3 Background radiation
Part of this experiment involves measuring background radiation. This background level
has many sources including long lived terrestrial radioactive species, cosmic rays and
remnants from nuclear experiments. For most people the most significant source is due to
radon gas formed as part of the decay series of uranium.
2.4 Philip Harris Protactinium Generator
Protactinium234 has a half-life of approximately 70 seconds, and is suitable for the
observation of radioactive decay. This isotope is one of the products from the U238 decay
series, part of which is shown below.
О±
238
U 92
––——›
4.5x109
years
lowenergy ОІ
234
Th90
––——›
24 days
highenergy ОІ
234
Pa91
––——›
234
U 92
72 secs
To achieve isolation of Pa234, a less dense, water immiscible, organic liquid is added to a
solution of a Uranium238 salt in concentrated Hydrochloric acid. Protactium234 is soluble
in this organic layer. When the liquids are shaken and they are mixed together, the Pa234 is
extracted by the organic solvent. When the mixture is allowed to settle, a physical
separation into two layers occurs, where the Pa234 is now in the upper layer. The Pa234
decay is monitored, in this experiment by a Geiger-Muller Tube which is placed close to
the top of the containment flask.
Several factors combine to make sure that the source can exhibit a Pa234 half-life:
• Thorium234 in confined to the low aqueous layer; beta radiation from this, and alpha
radiation from the Thorium230 can scarcely penetrate the flask.
• U234 and U238 also both concentrate in the aqueous layer: They are alpha emitters.
• Pa234 is a beta emitter, with a high enough energy spectrum to penetrate both the liquid
in which the source is sited, and the walls of the flask.
• Radiation from freshly born Pa234 nuclides cannot penetrate through from the bottom
layer.
2.5 The Geiger-Muller Detector
A Geiger-Muller (GM) detector in its simplest form consists of a thin wire (the anode)
mounted along the longitudinal axis of a cylindrical metal tube (the cathode). The tube is
filled with a gas at low pressure and a potential difference is applied between the anode
and cathode. Radiation entering the detector ionises the gas, producing, for each photon or
particle entering, a burst of ions. These ions are accelerated to the electrodes by the
potential difference and constitute an electrical current pulse. Successive pulses are
recorded in a counter unit.
Beta-particles are readily detected by a GM detector. Most alpha-particles cannot pass
through the detector window. Gamma-rays are so penetrating that only a small, but
constant, fraction of those entering the tube actually interact with the gas and are detected.
58
Figure 2: Schematic diagram of Geiger-Muller characteristic
For a fixed radiation rate the number of pulses detected depends mainly on the potential
difference between the electrodes as shown in figure 2. As the potential difference is
increased from a low value the pulse rate increases until the potential difference reaches a
range over which the pulse rate changes very little. This is called the (Geiger) plateau. At
higher voltages a continuous discharge occurs. The usual recommended operating
potential difference for a detector is approximately half way along the plateau. However,
not being too close to the extremes of the plateau will suffice.
Wider Applications
• The mathematics of radioactive decay is common to many areas of physics, such as
the charging and discharging of capacitors
• Counting experiments and their statistics are widespread in all sciences.
59
Experiment 9: Rotational motion and Moment of Inertia (MoI) with a
torsion pendulum
Safety: This experiment makes use of a relatively long thin steel rod. Care should be
taken to ensure that it is positioned below eye level and does not point towards the (eye
of) the user.
Equipment List: Outline
The physics: A torsion pendulum is used to illustrate some of the concepts associated with
rotational motion (motion around an axis). In particular the importance of the shape that
is rotating is considered via its “moment of inertia” (or “rotational inertia”).
Measurements are used to reveal the (unknown) internal structure of a hollow spherical
body (a hockey ball).
Experimental techniques: This experiment provides a good example of the process of
establishing a scientific technique. A test phase (in which known samples are measured)
characterises the system (i.e. calibrates it and determines its accuracy and precision)
before it is used in anger on real (unknown) samples.
Experimental skills
• Making and recording basic measurements; experimental observation; analysis of
straight line graphs.
• Establishing a scientific instrument by characterisation with known samples, before
employing it to measure an unknown sample.
• Detailed data analysis (of the hollow sphere arrangement).
Wider applications
• At the large scale consider the moon rotating around the Earth, the Earth around the
Sun, the Sun around the galaxy. The spring semester module (PX1225 Planets and
Exoplanets) shows MoI measurements to reveal the internal structure of planets.
• At the small scale consider electrons orbiting a nucleus.
• At the human scale consider almost every machine: the motor car; the electric motor;
water-pumps; windmills….
1. Background notes.
School physics and mathematics courses discuss “translational” motion in which a body
moves in one or two (or three) dimensions. By introducing “rotational” motion, in which
a body turns about an axis (Resnick and Walker Chapters 10 and 11), any motion to be
described. For example a ball rolling down a hill is a combination of both types.
However, this experiment confines itself to illustrating the case of rotational motion and
in particular focuses on the concept of the moment of inertia (MoI) the rotational
equivalent of inertial mass.
1.1 The Torsion pendulum
This is a variation on the mass on a spring experiment in which a vertical displacement of
the mass from its equilibrium position results in simple harmonic motion (SHM) provided
that the restoring force is proportional to displacement. Here the displacement is an
angular displacement (rotation), Оё of the mass and the restoring torque (rather than force)
is due to torsion (twisting) in the spring.
The condition for SHM here is that the restoring torque is proportional to the angular
displacement
60
Я¬ аµЊ в€’ЯўЯґ
[1]
where Оє (kappa) is a constant known as the torsion constant.
By comparison with SHM for a mass on a spring, the oscillation angular frequency of the
system is expected to be
߱ൌට
а°‘
аЇ‚
(radians per second) [2]
where I is the moment of inertia of the system.
1.2 Moment of Inertia, I (aka Rotational Inertia)
The moment of inertia (MoI) of a body indicates how mass is distributed about its axis of
rotation. It is a constant for a particular rigid body and axis of rotation (consequently the
axis must be specified for the value to be meaningful).
A point mass m a distance r from the rotation axis has a MoI of mr2. The MoI of a body
can be found by considering it as a collection of i particles of mass mi at different
distances ri from the axis of rotation. The MoI of the ith particle is given by ݉௜ ‫ݎ‬௜ଶ and the
total MoI inertia, I by the sum for all particles:
‫ ܫ‬ൌ Σ݉௜ ‫ݎ‬௜ଶ
[3]
This equation is extremely important generally (and to this experiment) for two main
reasons:
• It indicates that masses further from the axis have a greater affect on MoI.
• It is the basis (via adding known MoI) of determining both an unknown MoI and the
torsion constant of the spring.
1.3 MoI of different shapes
Resnick and Walker (Principles of Physics, chapter 10) discuss how the MoI of
continuous bodies (of uniform density) can be found by replacing the sum with an integral
instead of a summation
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ‫ ݎ ׬‬ଶ ݀݉
[4]
where dm is a mass element and r its distance from the rotational axis. Select results from
this of relevance here are presented in table 1.
Table 1. Moments of Inertia for shapes of importance here (r represents distances or radii
as appropriate, L represents length)
Shape
Point mass
Solid cylinder
Axis
Through point
Through central axis
Sphere
Through centre
MoI, I
݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ
1
݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ
2
Hollow, thinwalled:
ଶ
Thin rod
Through centre,
perpendicular to length
ଶ
а¬·
݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ
Solid: ହ ݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ
1
݉‫ܮ‬ଶ
12
MoI are of the form n(mr2), n being different for different bodies. With this in mind the
value n will subsequently be referred to as the “pre-factor”.
1.3.1 Spheres
61
The different pre-factors in table 1 for thin walled hollow and solid spheres is of particular
interest to this experiment. They indicate that as the wall thickness increases the prefactor will decrease from 2/3 to 2/5, or alternatively that by measuring the pre-factor the
wall thickness can be determined. Finding the pre-factor requires the MoI, mass and outer
radius of the sphere.
The mathematics will be illustrated by starting with the MoI of a thin walled sphere and
developing an integral for the general case and the specific case of a solid sphere.
The mass of a (thin walled) sphere of density, ПЃ, radius r and thickness dr is given by its
density multiplied by its thickness, i.e. ߩ4ߨ‫ ݎ‬ଶ ݀‫ݎ‬. Therefore an alternative form of its
MoI is
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ߩߨ‫ ݎ‬ସ ݀‫ݎ‬
а¬ј
а¬·
[5]
From this the MoI of a thick walled sphere can be found using a straightforward
integration
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ‫׬‬௥ మ ߩߨ‫ ݎ‬ସ ݀‫ݎ‬
аЇҐ а¬ј
а°­
а¬·
[6]
For the case of a uniform solid sphere of radius r, we have r1 = 0, r2 = r and Э‰ аµЊ Я©
so that
а¬ј
ଶ
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ଷ×ହ ߩߨ‫ ݎ‬ହ ൌ ହ ݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ ,
as expected.
where r1 and r2 are the inner and outer radii respectively.
а¬ёа°—аЇҐ а°Ї
а¬·
1.4 Characterising a multiple component system
If, as here, the torsion constant of the spring and the rotational inertia of a component are
unknown then experiments must be devised to find them. The approach is to add known
rotational inertia (from equations 3 and 4 and table 1) to the system and find the effect on
the frequency of the torsion pendulum.
If the unknown (starting) rotational inertia is I0 and for i additional bodies is ‫ܫ‬஺ ൌ ∑ ‫ܫ‬௜
then the total rotational inertia is
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ‫ܫ‬଴ ൅ ‫ܫ‬஺
[7]
where I0 is fixed and unknown but the (multiple) contributions to IA are known. With this
in mind equation 2 can be re-written
ଵ
а° а°®
аµЊа°‘аµЊ
аЇ‚
аЇ‚аІІ
а°‘
аµ… а°‘а°¬
аЇ‚
[8]
So that a graph of 1⁄߱ଶ versus ‫ܫ‬஺ will be a straight line of gradient 1⁄ߢ and intercept
‫ܫ‬଴ ⁄ߢ, allowing both ‫ܫ‬଴ and ߢ to be found.
Note: with two unknowns a minimum of two measurements are required but in practice
more will be taken to reduce errors and improve precision.
62
2. Experiment
2.1 Apparatus
High stability (triangular based) retort stand. Moment of inertia kit: main body; thin rod,
2x add-on masses, training hockey ball with screw thread. Oscillations are timed with a
stop watch.
Table 1 Properties of components (errors represent range of values measured)
Body
Mass /g
Main body (with 2 screws)
73.0В±.1
Thin rod
16.55В±0.15
Short cylindrical mass (with screw)
16.5В±0.1
Hockey ball* (diameter 7.23В±0.02 cm)
157В±5
Spring
4.70В±0.02
* Hockey balls are not all the same. Those studies here are made of spin cast PVC to give
a thick walled sphere and hollow centre.
2.2 Thin rod, point masses and characterisation of the system
This experiment adds a thin rod (symmetrically/balanced) to the main body and then a
matched par of masses to the rod at different distances from the rotation axis. Resulting
changes in angular frequency illustrate the operation of a torsion pendulum (equation 2),
the role of MoI and allow the torsion constant of the spring, Яў and the rotational inertia of
the main body, Io to be found.
Note:
• An assumption will be made that, as the spring is loaded and extended, its torsional
constant remains constant (measurements have been made that support this).
In the experiment the periods of oscillation are the main measurement. It is suggested that
10 oscillations (periods) are measured 3 times. To start the oscillations rotate the main
body by ~45o taking care to minimise any subsequent up/down motion. Do this for:
•
•
•
The main body (with 2 screws attached).
The main body with the thin rod attached centrally.
The above with the two small masses symmetrically (so that they are balanced)
attached at 8 distances from the axis.
Hint you will need to use Table 1 to calculate the MoI of the fixed rod and the masses at
each of their positions.
•
Referring to equation 8, draw a suitable graph and use it to help determine values for
I0 and Оє and their associated errors. Hint you will also need to calculate
2.3 Hollow sphere (hockey ball)
Armed with the characteristics of the torsion pendulum (i.e. values for I0 and Оє) the next
step will be to use our (now established) scientific instrument to measure and learn
something about an unknown object. The measurement here is quick and easy but data
analysis will take some time.
63
•
•
•
Screw the hockey ball to the main body – there is no need to use more than ~half the
thread on the screw. Hint: the measurement is easier if you keep the thin rod (without
masses) attached.
Carefully measure the period of oscillation.
Calculate the moment of inertia of the hockey ball (using equation 8), then its “prefactor” (݊ ൌ ‫ ܫ‬⁄݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ ). You may need to refer back to section 1.3 at this point.
2.3.1 Further data analysis
Extracting meaning from data (like taking measurements) is a skill and one that
undergraduates initially struggle with engage with:
•
•
•
It’s easier to simply present measurements and superficial analyses
It is a step further from experiments that simply illustrate a piece of coursework
Thought, effort and time is required and often it isn’t obvious what the course of an
analysis might be or where it might lead
This measurement, where a little data leads to a relatively large amount of analysis, is a
good one to use to illustrate the analysis process and the way scientists question data.
As with most problem solving the biggest hurdle is overcome by starting/getting going, so
it’s always best to start with something simple and easy:
Superficially consider the pre-factor (and its errors) for the hockey ball:
• Is it in the expected range (2/5-2/3) - and therefore reasonable?
If not then there is a problem that needs to be corrected: always start by checking
for mathematical errors (everyone makes them).
If there is still a problem it may be indicating that there are systematic errors –
finding this may be a larger task.
• If it is in the expected range where is it? Does it imply a very thin or thick walled
sphere?
(This is not to pre-judge the result, just a way of thinking scientifically).
Quantitative analysis: to produce figure out a value for the wall thickness using
equation 6.
There are many ways of doing this – but being unfamiliar with the measurement and
analysis it is best to pick one that is intuitive, instructive, easily checked and preferably
general.
•
Generate a graph of expected pre-factor (݊ ൌ ‫ ܫ‬⁄݉‫ ݎ‬ଶ ൌ ‫ ܫ‬⁄݉‫ݎ‬ଶଶ ) versus ratio of radii
(inner/outer).
This can be achieved by setting r2 to 1 and varying r1 between 0 and 1 – as r1 then
represents the ratio. Equation 6 is then
‫ ܫ‬ൌ ‫׬‬௥
ଵ଼
а°­
а¬·
ߩߨ‫ ݎ‬ସ ݀‫ ݎ‬ൌ ଵହ ߩߨሺ1ହ − ‫ݎ‬ଵହ ሻ
а¬ј
and the mass of the hollow sphere is
Э‰аµЊ
а¬ёа°�а°—
а¬·
ሺ1 − ‫ݎ‬ଵଷ ሻ
ሺ0 ≤ ‫ݎ‬ଵ ≤ 1ሻ
ሺ0 ≤ ‫ݎ‬ଵ ≤ 1ሻ
Tabulate values for I and m as a function of r1 and use this to generate your graph.
•
Check the graph.
Does the pre-factor vary over the correct range (i.e. is the maths correct)?
64
[9]
[10]
•
Comment upon the regime where the experiment will be most (and least) sensitive
to changes in wall thickness.
Compare the experimental pre-factor (and its error) with the graph to find the ratio of
radii and then the inner radius (and their errors).
Don’t do the following if there isn’t time.
A further obvious stage (if you think about it) would be to calculate a value for the density
of the material of the hockey ball. As it is already known that it is made of PVC the value
can be compared with its accepted (range) of density values – this might add or subtract
from confidence in the measurements. If the material was unknown the value might have
suggested possible materials.
65
Experiment 10: Long Report Writing.
You have been tasked with writing a formal report on one of the experiments
performed so far (numbers 4 to 9). This report forms 1/3 of your total
module mark for PX1123 and is due in at 4pm on the last day of the
semester. It is a compulsory element of the course and is developing skills
that you will need throughout your degree and in your fture careers
This is likely to be your first experience of writing a scientific report of your
own findings and is a skill that you are expected to have to work on. You
will write 2 formal reports in each of your 1st and 2nd years, leading up to the
presentation of the larger body of work of your 3rd (and maybe 4th) year
independent research projects.
To help you, we have provided some guidelines on page 9 of this manual,
with an example report given on page 164. You will find on learning central
some useful screencasts on the use of Microsoft Word and Excel and also
Equation Editor.
Don’t get hung up on word count, although we do provide a guidance. In
scientific writing it is very important to say as much as is needed while using
as few words as possible. These reports should be thorough, but repettion
should be avoided. The entire report shoul be clear and straightforward, with
good flow between sections.
We advise you to read the background material provided. Maybe also take a
look at some scientific papers from common Physics journals; this will get
you used to the form of language used.
Your lab supervisors are available today to answer any questions you have
about this task. ANY questions! You can ask us about using Word, use of
language, how you format things, how you write an abstract, what referencs
are, etc.
Your report will be returned to you at the beginning of the second semester
with a large amount of feedback. We will also run a special session on report
writing in PX1223 – so you can see how important we think this skill is! Do
your best.
66
Experiment 11: Some end of semester fun physics в�є
Have you ever heard of Rube Goldberg, or Heath Robinson? Try typing them into
Google to get a feel for what this experiment will be about.
Many years ago, there was also a challenge on the
TV called “the great egg race” which initially
tasked teams of people to transport an egg without
breaking it from A to B. This idea was later
extended by “scapheap challenge” which did
similar challenges on a grander scale in, you
guessed it, a scrap heap.
For the ideal Rube Goldberg type machine see:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qybUFnY7Y8w
Whilst we are not intending anything quite on this scale we want you to be imaginative
and transport a ping pong ball (an egg would just be too risky) from one end of a
workbench to the other, in as many interesting phases as possible, with an understanding
of the basic laws of mechanics and motion that you have been working on all semester.
You should try to include elements of linear and angular momentum, friction, (even flight
if you think you can control it). However the sting in the tail, is that at the end of the table
the ping pong ball must drop into a bucket on the floor, and when you have done this you
must be able to show a good understanding (calculation) of the typical energy stored in
the system for you to have done this. Estimate how much energy was needed to set the
system going, how much potential energy was stored, how much energy was dissipated,
and how much kinetic energy was left at the end when the ball plopped into the bucket.
Marks will be awarded for the creativity of the contraption and also for the creative
understanding of the physics.
Within reason you are free to use whatever you can lay your hands on (beg and borrow).
Check with demonstrators or the lab technician before using anything “unusual”. Trial
and error is allowed, but bare in mind you have the necessary mathematical tools to have
a first stab at calculating what you might need.
You could just do a simple ramp at one end, at just the right angle to overcome friction
losses, so that the ping pong ball just rolls into the bucket (to fast and it will miss).
However, would this work everytime (errors), and where’s the fun in that.
Labdiaries should be kept as usual, although this really will be a diary as you try things
out and dismiss them as either wrong or not feasible. Failure is expected, and there is
certainly no model solution.
67
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
Experiment 12: Air resistance
Note: You must keep a real time lab diary in the usual way and aim to finish all analysis
within the 4 hours. Your lab book will taken in at the end of the 4 hour session.
Equipment: 3 muffin cases, 1 m rule, stopwatch.
Safety: Students must not raise themselves (unreasonably) off the floor to gain extra
height and must perform the experiment in the first year laboratory.
Outline
With only a reminder of the important physics, you are asked to determine as much as you
can about a very simple system: muffin cases falling vertically through the air. Some
students may have come across this experiment before, however it is demanding in terms
of both experimental skill and analysis - do not underestimate it.
Experimental skills
• Making and recording basic measurements: heights and times (and their errors).
• Making use of trial/survey experiments.
• Careful experimental observation.
Wider Applications
• Planes, trains and automobiles are all designed to reduce air resistance in order to go
faster and/or travel more efficiently.
• The wider scientific field is that of fluid dynamics (the movement of fluids), a highly
complex field that includes the prediction of weather patterns and the processes of star
formation.
1. Introduction
The force due to air resistance (drag) acting on a body travelling through air is
proportional to ПЃAv2 where ПЃ is the air density; A is the cross sectional area of the body
and v is the velocity through the air.
The constant of proportionality is called (or at least is very closely related to) the “drag
coefficient”.
A special case is a body falling under the influence of gravity so that the downwards force
acting upon it is constant (mg). Starting from rest and given sufficient time the
downwards force and the drag reach equilibrium when the body is falling at its so called
“terminal velocity”.
2. Experimental
By a combination of experiment(s) and analysis discover as much as you can about the air
resistance of the system in the four hour laboratory session.
Notes:
• By dropping multiple cases together the mass can be increased without changing the
cross sectional area.
• Take the density of air (ρ) to have a value of exactly 1.2 kg.m-3.
• 75 muffin cases have a mass of 42 g (with an error of +/- 1 g).
• Compared to normal teaching lab diaries, your notes will need to contain more
procedural information (since no instructions are available to refer to).
• Demonstrators are available to bounce ideas off – not for telling you how to go about
your investigation.
68
Experiment 13: Writing Formal Reports
At the end of PX1123 you wrote a Formal Report on one of the experiments you had
performed during the semester. These will have been thoroughly marked and lots of
feedback comments given. These will be handed back to you at the end of this session.
You will be required to write and submit another such report for PX1223 – it is expected
that you will have taken on board the feedback given and can greatly improve upon your
first attempt. This session is to assist with that process, so that you have a much clearer
idea of what will be expected of your future formal reports (in 2nd year lab and your 3rd
year project project).
So part 1 is to reread the information given on page 9 and the screencasts available on
Learning Central.
In part 2 you’ll be given a mock report – absolutely full of common mistakes. You are to
go through this, mark it and make a list of all the errors. Your lab supervisor will then
discuss these with you. Check them against the advice given in section 1.
For part 3, you will be given 3 real reports to mark and rank in quality order.
And finally, you should reread your own PX1123 report and understand the feedback
you’ve been given. Ask for explanation – we want you to do a really good job next time!
If you are uncertain as to how to use certain word-processing tools (for example an
equation editor), this is a good opportunity to ask.
69
Experiment 14: Propogation of Sound in Gases.
Note: This experiment is performed in the dark room.
SAFETY ASPECTS: MAKE SURE THAT THE ROOM FAN IS SWITCHED TO
EXTRACT AND IS WORKING.
Outline
The speed of sound is commonly used to refer specifically to the speed of sound waves in
air, although the speed of sound can be measured in virtually any substance and will vary.
The speed of sound in other gases will be dependent on the compressibility, density and
temperature of the media. You will investigate these dependencies by studying the sound
waves set up in various gases contained in a gas cavity.
Experimental skills
• Observation of longitudinal waves.
• Understand the use of a microphone as an acoustic to electric transducer.
• Hence using an oscilloscope to study non-electrical waves.
• Careful use of gases and gas cylinders.
Wider Applications
• In dry air at 20°C, the speed of sound is 343 metres per second. This equates to 1,236
kilometres per hour, or about one kilometer in three seconds. The speed of sound in
air is referred to as Mach 1 by aerospace professionals (i.e the ratio of air speed to
local speed of sound =1).
• The physics of sound propogation, reflection and detection is used extensively for
underwater locating (SONAR), robot navigation, atmospheric investigations and
medical imaging (Ultrasound).
• The high speed of sound is responsible for the amusing "Donald Duck" voice which
occurs when someone has breathed in helium from a balloon!
1. Introduction
The speed of propagation of a sound disturbance in a gas depends upon the speed of the
atoms or molecules that make up the gas, even though the movement of the atoms or
molecules is localised. The r.m.s. speed of molecules of mass m in a gas at Kelvin-scale
temperature T is given by;
1
пЈ® 3kT пЈ№ 2
c
=пЈЇ
пЈє ,
пЈ° m пЈ»
where k is the Boltzmann constant. The sound is not propagated exactly at the speed
2
1
2
1
пЈ±Оі пЈј 2
< c > but at пЈІ пЈЅ times it, where Оі is the ratio of the principal heat capacities of the
пЈі3пЈѕ
gas.
Thus
2
1
2
Csound = пЈ® ОіkT пЈ№
пЈЇ m пЈє
пЈ°
пЈ»
1
2
[1]
Measurement of csound for known T and m therefore enables Оі to be determined1.
70
In this experiment the speed of sound in gaseous argon, air (mainly nitrogen) and carbon
dioxide is measured by analysing the standing waves in a cavity.
2. Experiment
2.1 Apparatus
The standing wave cavity is shown schematically in Figure 1.
Figure 1: Standing wave cavity
The loudspeaker, driven from an oscillator, directs sound into the tube; standing waves
are obtained by adjustment of the piston and detected by the microphone insert at the end
of the tube. The output from the microphone is amplified and displayed on the
oscilloscope. Ensure that the amplifier is turned off when you have finished this
experiment.
Consider and write down the relationship between the length of the tube and the
wavelength of sound for standing waves in closed and open tubes. Revise these
expressions having considered this material using reference 2 or another source. Should
you treat your equipment as having two closed ends or one open and one closed? Why?
Show that the length of the tube L is related to the wavelength as L = О»/4, 3 О»/4, 5 О»/4, 7
О»/4
О»
i.e. L = (2n в€’ 1) , where n is an integer .
4
Note. The volume of sound coming from the speaker should be made as small as possible.
Use the most sensitive Volts/Div setting on your oscilloscope.
2.2. Experimental procedure
There may be traces of carbon dioxide in the tube from the previous experiment. This
must be removed by pushing the piston in and out of the tube over its full travel several
times.
Switch on the oscillator, and set it to give a sound at 1000 Hz. Find the approximate
positions of the maxima in the signal amplitudes. Plot the signal amplitude as a function
of piston position for all the accessible maxima (you will need to select a suitable step
size). Now plot the piston position for each maximum on a graph and deduce the
wavelength О» from the gradient. Calculate csound from the relation csound = fО», where f is
the frequency of the sound. Repeat the measurement for a number of other frequencies up
to 5000 Hz. Consider whether there is any significant variation in your results, and
71
attempt to account for it. Record the atmospheric temperature. Consider what affect the
temperature might have on the measured speed of sound.
Repeat the experiment at one of the higher frequencies with the monatomic gas argon in
the tube. Before attempting this, liaise with the demonstrator, who will arrange for the
supply of the gas from the gas cylinder.
Repeat the measurements at one frequency with carbon dioxide in the tube. Note any
differences in the quality of the signal obtained. Why does this happen?
Use your results to calculate the value of Оі, the ratio of the principal specfic heats of each
of the three gases, from equation [1].
In equation [1],
k = Boltzmann constant = 1.38 Г— 10-23 J K-1
T = temperature in Kelvin
m = mass of one gas molecule i.e. relative molecular mass Г— 1.66 Г— 10-27 kg
The relative molecular masses of argon, nitrogen and carbon dioxide are 40.0, 28.0 and
44.0 respectively.
Tabulate the values of Оі you obtain, together with the values given by the kinetic theory of
gases.
3. References
1
H.D. Young and R.A. Freedman, “University Physics”, Pearson, San Francisco, 2004,
p547
2
Resnick & Walker, “Principles of Physics”, Wiley edition 9, p457.
72
Experiment 15: Magnetic Fields and Electric Currents.
Equipment List: Current balance, rheostat (a coil of wire with a slider used to vary its
effective resistance), Weir p.s.u., multi-meter (rated to 10 A), small magnetic compass,
A4 paper.
Safety. The current balance may spark. The resistor can get VERY hot over time.
Outline
The shape of the magnetic field lines in the vicinity of two separated permanent magnets
and around a current carrying wire is investigated using small magnetic compasses. The
force on a current carrying wire passing through the magnetic field of permanent magnets
is then investigated using a “current balance” and used to obtain a value for the size of the
magnetic field. The experiment illustrates the properties introduction to magnetic
materials and essential concepts of electromagnetic theory.
Experimental skills
• Make and record measurements of magnetic field lines.
• Familiarity with the magnitude of magnetic fields generated by electrical currents and
permanent magnets.
• Experience of the effect of stray magnetic fields in a laboratory environment.
• Application of vector cross products to real situations.
• Use of ballast resistor to limit current flowing in circuit.
Historical perspective and wider applications
Magnetic materials: the use of lodestone as a crude magnetic compass dates to ~1000 BC.
Electromagnetism: In 1819 in Copenhagen Hans Oersted discovered, almost by accident,
that a compass needle can be influenced by a nearby electrical current. This was the birth
of electromagnetism, one of the most important fields in both science and engineering,
with profound influence on modern life:
• Michael Faraday discovered electromagnetic induction and developed the idea of a
field for dealing action at a distance effects.
• These ideas led to delopment of the dynamo, motor and transformer.
• James Clerk Maxwell put the field ideas into mathematical form and predicted
electromagnetic waves.
• Einstein’s consideration of the need for relative motion led to the theory of relativity.
1. Introduction
Magnetic fields can arise from magnetic materials and from moving charges. This
experiment is concerned with examining both such fields and also the forces resulting
from the interaction between magnetic fields and moving charges (due to a current
flowing through a wire).
1.1 Magnetic fields
Magnetic fields are vectors and therefore have both a direction and a magnitude (or
strength). They are produced by magnetic objects or by moving charges. The oldest
known magnetic field is that due to the Earth and this leads to the concept of poles and the
first way of defining the direction of the field. , i.e. a “North pole” will point to the
Earth’s North pole (which since opposite poles attract magnetically must itself be a South
pole).
The direction of a magnetic field is defined to be that in which a North pole will move.
73
Magnetic compasses point in the direction of a magnetic field, i.e. towards a magnetic
south pole.
Magnetic fields can vary wildly in both magnitude and direction as a function of position,
are therefore mathematically complex, and are often visualised by way of “field lines”.
These are constructed by using arrows to indicate the direction of the field at various
points and then connected by lines. The number of lines used must be limited and this is
done in such a way that the density of the lines in the vicinity of a point gives an
indication of the relative strength of the field. An example, representing a bar magnet, is
shown in Figure 1. The permanent magnets used here are similar to the one shown except
that their poles are wider than their length.
Figure 1: Magnetic field lines in the vicinity of a bar magnet [1]
Figure 1 also hints at another important property of magnetic field lines. Unlike electric
or gravitational field lines they form loops. This relates to the fact that there is no such
thing as a magnetic monopole.
1.2 Electromagnetic theory (and vector cross products)
Electromagnetic theory gives the magnetic force, F, exerted on a charge, q, moving with
velocity, v, in a magnetic field as
F = qv x B
(N)
[1]
At the same time the magnetic field generated by a point charge moving with velocity v is
Вµ q
B = 0 [v Г— r ]
(tesla, T)
[2]
4ПЂr 2
where r is the vector from the point charge to the point at which the field is determined
and Вµ0 is the permittivity of free space (Вµ0 = 4ПЂ x 10-7 H/m or 1.26 x 10-6 TmA-1).
These definitions are given as vector cross products, so although students may be more
familiar with the use of Flemings left and right hand rule for determining directions here it
makes more sense to use the more general rules for dealing with vectors.
The case is illustrated for two vectors a and b is shown in Figure 2.
74
z direction
axb=c
b
Оё
a
b x a = -c
Figure 2: The cross products of two vectors a and b separated by an angle Оё. The resultants are in
a direction perpendicular to the plane containing both a and b.
For the cross product c = a Г— b the direction is perpendicular to the plane formed by a and
b and its direction is given by the Right Hand Rule*:
• Imagine your right hand pointing along a.
• Curl the fingers around from a to b.
• The thumb then points in the direction of c.
* From this the coordinate system being use is said to be right handed. As drawn above, a
Г— b = c is in direction = +z whereas b Г— a = в€’ c is in the negative z direction. (In a left
handed system following a left handed rule the directions are reversed).
Using this rule, and bearing in mind that the move charges in this experiment will always
be negatively charged electrons, equations 1 and 2 can be used to determine the direction
of both force and magnetic field vectors.
Note: Ultimately these two models for magnetic fields, poles and flowing currents, are
identical and equivalent and the magnetic fields produced by magnetic materials originate
in microscopic currents flowing cooperatively. The magnetic pole model is therefore a
simplistic viewpoint but one that is very useful in many circumstances. Both approaches
will be employed here.
1.3 Charges moving in a wire
The above descriptions for individual charges whilst useful for considering the direction
of force and field vectors requires development for the situation here where there are
many moving charges (electrons) and all are confined to a metallic wire.
For a conductor carrying a current in a magnetic field in the case where the current, I and
field, B are perpendicular the force on the wire is given by
F = BIL
(N)
[3]
where L is the length of the wire in the field. This comes from a consideration of the
number and velocity of charges experiencing the magnetic field and is derived in the
lecture courses and in Young and Freeman.
Somewhat similar considerations can be applied to the magnitude of the magnetic field
around a straight conductor. The field lines in this case are circles concentric with the
wire and decrease with distance r from the wire. For an infinitely long conductor the
magnitude of the field is given by:
Вµ I
(tesla, T)
[4]
B= 0
2ПЂr
Magnetic field lines due to a current in a wire are shown in Figure 3.
75
magnetic
field
lines
current
carrying
wire
Figure 3. Magnetic field lines surrounding a current carrying wire. For the direction of the field
lines shown the current is in a direction out of the page.
2. Experimental
2.1 Apparatus (the current balance)
The equipment, shown part assembled in Figure 4, consists of a copper frame (scribed on
one side) which balances on two pivot edges. A break in the frame, in the region of the
pointer, ensures that any current flowing between the pivots only passes through one
“arm” of the frame. The pointer can be positioned in the opening of a support that
restricts its movement. The current carrying arm is placed in the magnetic field centrally
between the poles of strong permanent magnets mounted on mild steel yokes. With this
arrangement, the current, magnetic field and movement of the wire are all at right angles
and so equation 3 applies.
poles
Figure 4: Frame mounted on centrally positioned pivot edges. The pointer is to the left and is
shown within the support. Current flows only through the arm on the right, passing between the
of permanent magnets.
Electrical circuit: The copper frame has a very low resistance (~0.2 Ω) so to protect the
power supply unit and the equipment (from high currents) a ballast resistance of ~5 Ω
should be placed in series with the frame. The variable resistor (rheostat) provided is a
76
suitable ballast (in terms of resistance value and current capacity). The rheostat has three
terminals and a maximum resistance of ~10 Ω. To obtain a resistance of ~5Ω simply
move the top slider half way along the coil and make sure to use the top and one of the
bottom connectors. The power supply unit (dc output) and an ammeter set to its 10 A
range and also in-series completes the circuit.
When required use the dial on the poser supply unit to set the current.
IMPORTANT: Currents must not be allowed to exceed 2.5 A and reduce the current
to zero between measurements.
Magnets: When making calculations it will be assumed that the “magnets” are exactly 5
cm in length, have no “edge effects”. No “edge effects” implies that the magnetic field
confined to the region directly between the poles - in reality it spreads a little. This is
addressed again in section 2.2.
Weights: In this experiment, small pieces of photocopier paper (cut up using scissors) will
be used. A figure of merit for paper is its areal mass density and the photocopier paper
used by the School is indicated to be 80 g/m2. Measurements show that this figure is
accurate to +/- 1% and so the areal density should be written as 80.0 +/- 0.8 g/m2. This
accuracy is more than sufficient for the purposes of this experiment.
Since the wire frame balances on a pivot, forces on the frame should be considered as
moments. However if masses are added on the same section of the frame that passes
through the magnets, the distance from the points of application of the force to the pivot is
the same and it is sufficient to only consider forces.
Field line measurements: Early experiments examine the shape of (permanent) magnetic
field lines and small magnetic compasses are used for this purpose.
2.2 The magnetic field lines associated with permanent magnets
The nature of the magnetic field surrounding a single permanent bar magnet with a similar
geometry to that used in this experiment is shown in figure 1. This part of the experiment
examines the more complicated case of: (i) two such magnets separated by a fixed gap;
(ii) two such magnets separated by the same extent but mounted on a “U” shaped yoke.
Set up
• On a fresh piece of A4 paper place the two magnets, centrally and with N pole facing
S so that they attract first of all separated by the wooden block. The wooden block is
not magnetic and so has no effect on observations).
• Trace around the magnets so that they can be re-positioned if moved accidentally.
Experiment
• Use the small compass to determine the direction of the field lines* in the vicinity of
the magnets: find the direction of the field line at a point, draw an arrow in the
position of the compass, move the compass along in the direction of the field line and
repeat.
Concentrate on one side of the magnet and take enough measurements to illustrate
symmetry and to generate a reasonably accurate impression of the field lines (as in
Figure 1).
• Repeat the process for the same magnets separated by a “U” shaped yoke (the magnets
should still be oriented N-S and the wooden block should be removed).
• Describe and attempt to account for the difference between the two cases.
77
*A useful point to note: after being disturbed the compass needle exhibits a damped
oscillation, whose frequency increases with field strength.
2.3 Oersted’s experiment (A classic experiment of physics)
Reminder: Oersted’s experiment, that started the field of electromagnetism, was simply
the observation that currents travelling through wires affected a magnetic compass in its
vicinity. Here the effect will be used to confirm the cross product expression given in
equation 2.
Set up
• The equipment should be set up as shown in Figure 4, although the magnets are not
required at this stage and it is not important for the frame to be balanced, it can be
held horizontal using the support (shown on the left).
• Connect the power supply unit using the dc output: Use red wires to connect the
current balance to the positive output and black wires to the negative output (this will
help when determining the direction of charge flow) and pass the current through an
ammeter on its 10 A range.
Experiment
• Place the small compass close to the frame (as close as possible without touching) and
confirm, such as by increasing the current to 2.5 A and then decreasing it again in
different positions around the wire, that the current has an effect on the compass.
This, in essence, was Oersted’s experiment. Take care, the wire will spark.
Whilst a movement of the compass needle due to the current in the wire should be
obvious it is true that the effect is weak. Most notably the contribution due to the current
is competing with the Earth’s magnetic field (which varies with position but is in the
range 30-60 ВµT) and with that due to the steel in the bench system.
•
•
Use estimates and observations to decide the origin of the largest contribution to the
field experienced by a compass when it is as close as possible to the wire carrying a
current of 2.5 A.
Passing a current of 2.5 A through the wire for short periods, and with reference to
Figure 2, use the compass to determine the direction of the magnetic field. Confirm,
through consideration of the direction of current/charge flow, that the direction is as
predicted by equation 2. (Demonstrators will expect to see a suitably labelled diagram
here).
2.4 Investigation of a force on a current carrying wire in a magnetic field
The current I (A) and length L (m) of wire in the field can be varied independently and the
magnetic force F (N) measured by balancing it against the force due to known masses in
the gravitational field. The magnetic field B (T) is determined by the strength of the
permanent magnets and their separation and has a constant value that is measured in this
experiment. Once the magnetic field strength has been found the apparatus is used as a
mass balance to measure (relatively small) masses.
Set up
• Connect the voltage source, the rheostat, the ammeter and the balance in series. The
rheostat is a coil of wire with a slider used to vary its effective resistance. It is a
useful way of controlling current in this experiment.
• The next objective is to balance the frame with no magnetic forces acting on it. To aid
this one side of each frame has been finely scribed. Locate the scribed grooves on the
78
balance with the pointer between the balance indicator (this will limit the movement
of the frame). Finely balance the frame by moving the small metal rider along the
frame (best done with tweezers, but bear in mibd they are magnetic).
• Position the magnet so that the frame lies centrally between the “magnet’s” polepieces.
• Pass a current through the frame, ensuring that the current is such that the arm is
raised. This upwards force will later be counterbalanced by weights placed on the
same section of the arm that passes through the magnet.
Experiment
• Cut out a square or rectangle of paper, measure its dimensions and place it on the
balance.
• Increase the current until the beam is balanced.
• Repeat the previous steps using different or additional areas of paper.
• Plot a suitable graph and use it to show that F is proportional to I and to calculate the
magnetic field, B for the magnets used.
Note: Clearly it is important that the frame and rider do not move during the course of the
experiment. If they move or are suspected to have moved it will be necessary to
rebalance the system with no masses and no current flowing.
References
1. http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/magnetic/elemag.html (accessed 2/11/10)
79
Experiment 16: Variation of Resistance with Temperature.
Safety Aspects: In this experiment you will use the cryogen liquid nitrogen (boiling point
77.3K). Please ensure that you read the safety precautions, write a risk assessment AND
seek the assistance of a demonstrator before using this.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN THE HANDLING OF LIQUID NlTROGEN
Avoid contact with the fluid, and therefore avoid splashing of the liquid when transferring
it from one vessel to another. Remember that when filling a "warm" dewar, excessive
boil-off occurs and therefore a slow and careful transfer is necessary. Do not permit the
liquid to become trapped in an unvented system. If you do not wear spectacles, safety
glasses (which are provided) must be worn when liquid nitrogen is being transferred from
one vessel to another.
FIRST AID
If liquid nitrogen contacts the skin, flush the affected area with water. If any visible
''burn" results contact a member of staff.
Outline
All materials can be broadly separated into 3 classes, according to their electrical
resistance; metals, insulators and semiconductors. This resistance to the flow of charge is
temperature dependent but the dependence is not the same for all material classes, because
of the physical processes involved. In this experiment you will determine the behaviour
of electrical resistance as a function of temperature for a metal and a semiconductor. You
will confirm the linearity or otherwise of these behaviours.
Experimental skills
• Ability to keep a clear head and organize a one-off experiment, paying careful
attention to safety aspects.
• Make and record simultaneous measurements of a number of time-varying quantities.
• Determine realistic errors in these quantities and combine them.
• Gain experience of liquid cryogens.
• Fit measured data to linear, polynomial and logarithmic expressions.
Wider Applications
• Many branches of physics and its applications involve the study and use of materials
at cryogenic temperatures (those below ~ 150K). By understanding the temperature
dependence of material behaviour, we can use it to our advantage.
• Modern imaging and communication systems rely on the sensitive, noiseless and
reproducible detection and transfer of electrical information. This is often achived by
using cooled semiconductor devices.
• Some materials become superconducting at cryogenic temperatures (i.e a temperature
somewhat above absolute zero). This phenomenon has found application in Medical
imaging (MRI scanners depend on the huge magnetic fields achievable only by using
superconducting coils); Astronomical imaging (superconducting detectors are used to
count 13 billion year old photons) and transport (MAGLEV trains).
80
1. Introduction
In this experiment you will investigate the variation of the resistance of: 1) a
semiconductor (a thermistor); 2) a metal (copper) in the temperature range from ~ 120 290 K.
For a metal the following equation [1] describes the linear behaviour of resistance R with
temperature T.
R(T)= R273(1 + О±(T-273)) ,
[1]
Where R(T) is the resistance at temperature T (in Kelvin), R273 is the resistance at 273K
andО± is a constant known as the temperature coefficient of resistance, which depends on
the material being considered and will vary slightly with the reference temperature (273K
here).
However the behaviour may be more closely described by a 2nd order polynomial fit.
RT = R273 {1 + О±(T-273) + ОІ(T-273) 2},
[2]
where ОІ is another constant.
For a typical intrinsic semiconductor the electrical resistance obeys an exponential
relationship with temperature. It takes the form of equation [3] .
RT = a eb/T ,
[3]
where RT is the resistance at T and a and b are constants.
By using equations [1], [2] and [3], you are to find suitable graphical ways to verify or
disprove these relationships. You may use Excel (or another plotting package familiar to
you) to plot your data, BUT remember to take care with axes, apply suitable error bars
and think about what your results mean.
2. Experiment
2.1 Apparatus
The metal you will test is in the form of a coil of fine wire. The semiconductor is a
thermistor. Both of these are attached to the top of a copper rod. They are held in good
thermal contact with it by a low-temperature varnish.
The temperature of the specimens can be reduced by immersing the copper rod to various
depths in liquid nitrogen, which boils at 77.3 K. The liquid nitrogen is poured into a
Dewar flask contained in the box which supports the copper-rod assembly. The
liquid-nitrogen level is gradually increased by adding liquid nitrogen through the funnel.
An insulating cap is provided which, when placed over the top of the rod, thermally
isolates the specimens from the surroundings and allows their temperature to fall to a
value determined by the depth of immersion of the rod in the liquid nitrogen.
81
The temperature of the specimens is measured with a thermocouple. This consists of two
junctions of dissimilar metals arranged as shown in Figure 1.
If the two junctions are at different temperatures an e.m.f. is generated which, to a
good approximation, is proportional to the temperature difference between the two
junctions. By calibrating such a thermocouple, temperature differences can be determined
by voltage measurements and these can be used to measure temperature if one standard
junction is held at a well-defined fixed temperature.
Figure 1: Representation of back-to-back thermocouple junctions and circuit
In this experiment we use a copper-constantan thermocouple. One junction of this is
embedded with the specimens in the varnish; the other, the standard, is kept at 77.3 K by
immersion in liquid nitrogen contained in a separate Dewar flask. You will calibrate the
thermocouple with the standard junction in liquid nitrogen while that attached to the metal
rod remains at room temperature.
The resistances of the copper and thermistor are read from multimeters suitably
connected. The voltage across the thermocouple is also read by a multimeter. Ensure you
can read all 3 scales simultaneously.
2.2 Calibration of the thermocouple
Connect a multimeter to the appropriate thermocouple terminals on top of the rod.
Immerse the free junction in liquid nitrogen and record a voltage. Take another voltage
reading when the junction is at room temperature. You can now calibrate the
thermocouple scale by assuming that the voltage is linearly related to temperature
difference. (This is not strictly true but will suffice for our purposes.) Check your
calibration with a demonstrator and ensure that you know how to use the thermocouple as
a thermometer for the rest of the experiment.
2.3 Resistance measurements
The magnitudes of the coil and thermistor resistances will be determined using
multimeters set to the ohms range.
Measure RC (the resistance of the copper coil) and RTh (the resistance of the thermistor) at
room temperature.
82
Place the insulating cap on top of the rod and start to add liquid nitrogen through the
funnel. Note the readings on the 3 multimeters (thermocouple voltage, Rc and RTh).
Gradually add more liquid nitrogen and repeat .The object of the experiment is to obtain
as many measurements of Rc and RT as possible over as wide a temperature range as
possible.
Remember to ensure that you have a simple diagram of your apparatus that would allow
you to set the experiment up again.
Experimental Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You must work quickly and efficiently if you are to obtain sufficient experimental
points on the graphs
Handle the Dewar flasks carefully.
DO NOT touch the copper rod when it has been immersed in liquid nitrogen. If
you do, you may freeze to the cold metal and give yourself a severe burn
You will find that there will be little change in temperature of the coil and the
thermistor when liquid nitrogen is added initially, but take care not to add too
much liquid nitrogen at any one time or a large temperature drop may result. Once
the rod has been cooled, it is not easy to raise the temperature again in the course
of the experiment. This is a one hit expereiment!
The lowest temperature you are likely to reach will be at best ~ 120 K.
Make notes in your lab diaries of anything that happens during the experiment,
e.g. where you note a change of range on the multimeter.
Make a note in your lab diary of the specific pieces of equipment that you have
used.
3. Data analysis
Plot suitable graphs of your data and investigate the validity of equations [1] and [2] for
the metal and equation [3] for the thermistor. Finding values of О±, ОІ, a and b.
You may use a computer package (Excel is recommended) to fit the equations but be
careful to check your axes, show error information and quote gradients and results to a
sensible number of significant figures.
Does the variation of resistance in a metal vary linearly with temperature? Which
equation gives the best fit to the data? What do you notice about the variation for a
semiconductor? Is the exponential fit of equation [3] good enough?
How might the experiment, errors in the data, or your experimental method be improved?
83
Experiment 17: Resistive and reactive impedances in RC circuits
Apparatus: GW Instek GDS-1022 oscilloscope, Thandar TG 102 Function generator,
~0.022 µF capacitor, ~4.3 kΩ resistor, breadboard, various leads and wires. Fluke multimeter made available to precisely measure value of resistance.
Outline
• An introduction to the behaviour of time varying electronic signals in electronic
circuits involving both reactive and resistive impedances, using a series combination
of a resistor and a capacitor.
• The investigation uses an oscilloscope to examine voltage signals for the capacitor
coupled/high pass filter arrangement. This allows the frequency dependence of the
phase angle between current and voltage and the filter performance to be found.
Experimental Skills
• Reinforcement of the use of coaxial leads and circuit construction with breadboards.
• Reinforcement of the use of oscilloscopes for measuring time varying electrical
signals.
• Introduction of oscilloscope techniques for measuring the phase differences between
signals in both Y-t and XY modes.
Wider Applications
• Resistor-capacitors combinations are widely used in electronic circuits as frequency
filters to let through (or pass) either low or high frequency signals, i.e. as low or high
pass filters respectively.
• With inductors in “LCR circuits”, resonance behaviour can occur described by
mathematics that is analogous to mechanical forced, damped oscillatory systems: This
behaviour is extensively covered in 1st year maths and in 2nd year physics labs.
These tuning circuits are what was at the core of the wireless (radio) communication
revolution.
• The visualisation of orthogonal oscillating signals, as seen during this experiment with
the oscilloscope in XY mode, has very close parallels with the different possible
polarisation of light: the analogies of linear, circular and elliptically polarised light are
all produced in this experiment.
1 Introduction
Capacitors, like resistors “impede” current flow, although not in the same way:
• A steady voltage applied to a capacitor causes a charge to build up on the plates of a
capacitor eventually preventing further current flow, whilst alternating currents can
flow on and off the plates; hence low frequency signals are impeded but high
frequency signals are not.
• Whereas resistors heat up and so dissipate electrical power (I2R) capacitors do not:
hence their impedance is said to be “reactive” rather than “resistive” (this is the same
for inductors whose impedance is also reactive).
• Whereas current and voltage are in-phase across a resistor they are 90° out of phase
across capacitors (and inductors).
It is the frequency dependence in alternating current (ac) circuits that has lead to
capacitors being widely used in electronic circuits. In analogue filter networks, they help
remove high frequency signals from dc power supplies or remove unwanted direct current
(dc) voltages from ac signals. In resonant circuits they can be used to �pick up’ particular
frequencies.
84
1.1 Impedances of resistors and capacitors
The above considerations lead to a distinction: the general term for something that
impedes current flow is called an “impedance” (Z); whereas the impedances of capacitors
(and inductors) are called reactive (X) and of resistors are called resistive (R).
In all cases impedances are measured in ohms and current and voltage are related by
Ьё
[1]
Ьј
In addition, of particular relevance here is that the total impedance of a circuit containing
series combination of a resistor (R) and a capacitor (XC) is given by:
‫ܫ‬ൌ
Ьј аµЊ Ьґ аµ… Ьєа®ј
[2]
Resistors: A reminder is probably not needed however, the relationship between the
current I through and voltage V across a resistor is I = V/R. If the voltage is varying
sinusoidally (i.e. ܸ ൌ ܸ଴ ‫ݐ߱݊݅ݏ‬, where ߱ሺൌ 2ߨ݂ሻ is the angular frequency) then:
‫=ܫ‬
ܸ଴ ‫ݐ߱݊݅ݏ‬
Ьґ
[3]
Hence current and voltage are in phase.
Capacitors: The equation that describes the behaviour of capacitors is ܳ = ‫ ܸܥ‬where Q is
the charge on the plates of the capacitor and C is the constant of proportionality to the
voltage across it and is known as its capacitance. In a similar fashion to a resistor the
magnitude of the charge on the capacitor varies in phase with the voltage. However, here
it is the phase difference between current and voltage that is of interest.
Current is given by
ЭЂЬі
ЭЂЬё
[4]
=‫ܥ‬
= ‫ܸܥ‬଴ ߱ܿ‫ݐ߱ݏ݋‬
݀‫ݐ‬
݀‫ݐ‬
Hence the current leads the voltage by 90В° and the magnitude of the reactance is given by
‫=ܫ‬
|Ьєа®ј | =
|Ьё|
|ܸ଴ ‫|ݐ߱݊݅ݏ‬
1
=
=
|‫ܸܥ| |ܫ‬଴ ߱ܿ‫ܥ߱ |ݐ߱ݏ݋‬
[5]
i.e. the reactance of a capacitor decreases with increasing frequency.
1.2 Series RC circuit theory.
Capacitors and resistors often occur in circuits together. In these “RC circuits” the
capacitive reactance and resistance combine to produce an overall circuit. The study of
current and voltage in a series combination of a resistor and a capacitor is the subject of
this experiment.
Consider a sinusoidally varying voltage source connected to a resistor and capacitor in
series as shown in figure 1. The instantaneous voltage across both components must
equal the input voltage and the instantaneous current at all parts of the circuit must be the
same hence equation [6]
ܸ௜௡ = ܸோ + ܸ஼ = ‫ܫ‬ሺܴ + ܺ஼ ሻ
85
[6]
Figure 1 Series combination of a resistor and capacitor and the voltages across them.
However, due to the phase differences the voltage across each component peaks at
different times and therefore it is incorrect to add their amplitudes. To understand and
express what is happening it is useful to make use of complex number representations.
(The alternative, the use of phasors and phasor diagrams, is briefly considered in the
appendix).
An Argand diagram of impedance, Z as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Argand diagram (similar to phasor diagram) for the impedance of a series RC circuit. The angle Я¶ is the phase
angle difference between current and input voltage, Vin.
The resistive impedance, R is on the real axis as current and voltage are in phase
(experimentally this is very important – measuring the voltage across any resistor gives
the phase of the current and, if R is known its magnitude).
By contrast the reactive impedance of the capacitor is given by:
Э†
[7]
߱‫ܥ‬
in order to be consistent with the current (which is the same at all parts of the circuit)
leading the voltage across the capacitor by 90В°.
аЇќ
Using equation 2 the impedance of the series combination of R and C is ܼ௧௢௧ ൌ ܴ െ ఠ஼
ܺ஼ ൌ െ
ଵ
The magnitude of the total impedance is given by |ܼ௧௢௧ | ൌ ටܴ ଶ ൅ ቀఠ஼ ቁ
86
ଶ
1.3 The capacitor coupled, high pass filter arrangement
A common practical use of RC circuits is as “frequency filters”. A voltage signal from
one part of the circuit is passed to the filter (as the filter input signal, Vin) and a different
signal (filter output, Vout = VR) is passed onto the next part of the circuit. With a series
combination of one capacitor and resistor Vin is applied across both components whilst
Vout is taken from either the capacitor or the resistor. Only the latter case will be
investigated in this study and is shown in figure 3. It is known as the “capacitor coupling
arrangement” as the capacitor connects to the circuit that precedes it.
Figure 3 Equivalent arrangements for capacitor coupling/high pass filter.
In this investigation the input signal to the filter Vin will be supplied by a signal generator
and both Vin and Vout will be monitored by an oscilloscope. This arrangement was chosen
since, as discussed previously, the voltage across the resistor (Vout) is the same as, and so
gives, the phase of the current.
From the Argand diagram in figure 2 the phase of the input voltage signal must be
between that across the resistor and capacitor. In addition, the phase angle between input
voltage (across both R and C) and current is given by
‫ ߶݊ܽݐ‬ൌ
1
[8]
ܴ߱‫ܥ‬
The amplitude of the output voltage can be found by considering the magnitude of the
impedances and considering the circuit as a voltage divider:
|ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ |
аµЊ
|ЬёаЇњаЇЎ |
Ьґ
аµЊ
ଶ
ටܴ ଶ ൅ ቀ 1 ቁ
߱‫ܥ‬
A fuller treatment of this is given in the appendix.
ܴ߱‫ܥ‬
ሺሺܴ߱‫ܥ‬ሻଶ ൅ 1ሻଵ⁄ଶ
[9]
Filter characteristics as a function of frequency, remembering that RC is the time constant
of the circuit, are summarised in table 1.
Table 1 Filter characteristics as a function of frequency
Frequency, аЈ“
Output signal, |аў‚аў•аў›аўљ |
Phase angle, аЈ�
߱ ൌ 1⁄ܴ‫ܥ‬
|ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ | аµЊ |ЬёаЇњаЇЎ |вЃ„в€љ2
߶ ൌ 45଴
߱ ≪ 1⁄ܴ‫( ܥ‬low frequency)
߱ ≫ 1⁄ܴ‫ ܥ‬ሺhighfrequencyሻ
|ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ | в†’ 0
|ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ | в†’ |ЬёаЇњаЇЎ |
87
߶ → 90଴
߶ → 0଴
At low frequencies the impedance of the capacitor dominates and most of the input
voltage is dropped across it, whereas at high frequencies the reverse is true. This is why
the arrangement is known as a high pass filter: the input signal is only passed on faithfully
(i.e. without attenuation) at high frequencies.
Aside: A “tweeter” is the loudspeaker in audio systems that is designed to generate high
frequency sound (f > 2 kHz typically). High pass filters very similar to the one measured
here are used to ensure that only the high frequencies are delivered to the tweeter.
2 Experimental
Using the prototype board, assemble the circuit in Figure 3 making use of three coaxial
leads and connector posts and ensuring that:
• When connecting jump leads to the 4 mm posts ensure that some bare wire protrudes
from the post: a common cause of poor connections is pinching down on the wires’
insulation.
• The earth of the three coaxial leads join at the same post (otherwise they will short out
voltage signals).
• The input and output signals are taken to Ch1 and Ch2 of the oscilloscope
respectively.
• The function generator is set to sine wave and its “dc offset” is turned off.
The capacitor and resistor provided have nominal values of 0.022 µF and 4.3 kΩ
respectively. However, measure the resistor value with a multi-meter and use this later to
find the value of the capacitor (the quoted tolerance on the value given is 10%).
With the circuit made up, get used to operating the oscilloscope again. Reminder: a
summary version of how to use the oscilloscope can be found in background notes. But
to start:
• Turn on the oscilloscope and when the GW Instek banner has disappeared press
“Save/Recall” then select “Default Setup” and finally press “Autoset”.
• Or you could simply press “Autoset” – but this may remember unsuitable previous
conditions.
Now:
• Adjust the signal generator to set an input signal (dc offset in off position) with a peak
to peak amplitude of ~3 V.
• Use the vertical adjustments on Ch1 and 2 so that they are both at 0V (the position
appears at the bottom left of the trace as they are being adjusted) to make phase and
signal changes more obvious.
• Check that the circuit is working as expected, i.e. that as the input signal frequency is
varied the output signal size and phase vary roughly as described at the end of section
1.3.
Note: the same circuit arrangement will be used for all subsequent measurements. If you
are unsure that it is working correctly check with a demonstrator.
2.1 Measuring the filter characteristics
With the set up as above, and with the time base and y scales adjusted as appropriate
perform measurements of frequency, f (and so period, T=1/f), Vin (although this isn’t
88
adjusted it may drift so measure it), Vout and the lead or lag of one oscillation against the
other, dT (and so the phase offset Я¶).
ЭЂЬ¶
ЭЂЬ¶
degreesб€єor2ЯЁ
radiansб€»
Ь¶
Ь¶
As 1 period, T, corresponds to 1 cycle, 360В°, 2ПЂ radians.
Note:
•
Я¶ аµЊ 360
Do this as a function of frequency (take ~10 readings in the range 200 Hz to 8000
Hz) recording the results in a suitable table.
Most measurements are made by the oscilloscope and can be read from its display using
its “measure” facility (use peak to peak amplitudes for voltages), but for dT use the two
X cursors (and then convert to radians or degrees as required). It will be necessary to
toggle between “cursor” and “measure”.
•
•
Make plots of phase angle and |ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ |/|ЬёаЇњаЇЎ | versus frequency, use these to find the
condition ߱ ൌ 1⁄ܴ‫ ܥ‬and so determine the value of the capacitance (see table 1).
Using the phase angle data plot a suitable straight line graph (see equation 8), use this
to determine the capacitance and compare the value with that above.
2.2 Using the oscilloscope XY mode for determination of filter characteristics.
Here the x axis is not time dependent, instead one of the two channel inputs produces x
deflections and the other y. This mode will be used to repeat the measurements of the
previous section, but first some explanation.
The movement of the spot on the screen is then described by
‫ ݔ‬ൌ ‫݊݅ݏܣ‬ሺ߱‫ݐ‬ሻ;
‫ ݕ‬ൌ ‫݊݅ݏܤ‬ሺ߱‫ ݐ‬െ ߶ሻ
[10]
where П† is the phase angle between the 2 inputs. In general this represents an ellipse, as
shown in Figure 4, although depending on the phase angle the ellipse may appear when
in-phase as a straight line through to, with A = B and 90В° out of phase, a perfect circle.
Such plots are known as Lissajous plots or figures.
Figure 4: Elliptical trace for the measurement of phase angle. Also shown dotted are straight line (Я¶=0) and circular
(߶ ൌ 90°, ‫ ܣ‬ൌ ‫ )ܤ‬traces.
Understanding the XY mode
To understand what you are seeing do the following (you will almost certainly need to get
help from a demonstrator to get you started here):
89
•
•
•
Sketch one period of a time varying sine wave and a cosine wave, both of amplitude 1,
in your diary. On both mark 10 reasonably evenly time spaced points and number
these from 0 to 9 (point at start and end of cycle numbered 0 and 9 respectively).
Draw an XY plot with scales -1 to +1 in both X and Y. On this and for the case when
both X and Y vary sinusoidally, plot out the time progression of the display using the
numbers 0 to 9 as markers (rather than x’s or o’s). This is a Lissajous figure for the
case of signals of the same frequency and in phase.
Repeat for X a sine wave and Y a cosine wave. This is the case of X and Y 90В° out of
phase. Using the time progression note whether the resulting (hopefully circular)
trace was drawn out in a clockwise or anticlockwise sense.
Analysis of plots such as figure 4 (to find both |аў‚аў•аў›аўљ |/|аў‚аўЏаў” | and аЈ�).
To find ߶ the line y = 0 (passing through A’,N’,O,N and A) through the ellipse is
considered.
We have
Hence
‫݊݅ݏܤ = ݕ‬ሺ߱‫ ݐ‬− ߶ሻ;
So that ߱‫߶ = ݐ‬
‫݊݅ݏܣ = ݔ‬ሺ߱‫ݐ‬ሻ = ‫ܰ| = ܰ = ߶݊݅ݏܣ‬′|
[11]
[12]
ܰ ܰܰ′
[13]
=
‫ܣܣ ܣ‬′
Here AA' is the difference length between the two extreme x values of the ellipse, and
NN' is the length given by the intersection of the ellipse with the x axis. Using the cursors
it is more convenient to obtain these from the oscilloscope trace than N and A.
And
‫= ߶݊݅ݏ‬
If the input signal (Vin) to a circuit (here the signal from the signal generator) is applied to
channel 1 (X) and the output signal (Vout) from the circuit (here from across the resistor)
to channel 2 then from figure 4 we have:
|ܸ௢௨௧ | ‫ܻ ܤ‬௣௣ ‫ܥ‬ℎ2௣௣
= =
=
|ЬёаЇњаЇЎ |
‫ܺ ܣ‬௣௣ ‫ܥ‬ℎ1௣௣
Where the pp subscript indicates peak to peak amplitude as the oscilloscope finds in its
“measure” mode.
Measurements
To put the scope in XY mode press the “menu” button under horizontal and then select
XY.
• Make measurements of |ܸ௢௨௧ |/|ܸ௜௡ |and phase offset ߶ versus frequency.
• Add this data to your earlier plots ($2.1) of phase angle and |ܸ௢௨௧ |/|ܸ௜௡ | versus
frequency and comment on the agreement.
3 Conclusions
As part of your concluding remarks consider the relative merits of the different methods
for measuring phase offsets and determining C.
90
Appendix: Complex number treatment of output voltage across the resistor
Э†
аµ°
߱‫ܥ‬
And, since the current must be the same in all parts of the circuit
We are dealing with a potential divider circuit in which (using complex ohm’s law)
ܸ௜௡ ൌ ‫ ܫ‬൬ܴ −
‫ܫ‬ൌ
Э†
Э†
б‰ЂЬґ аµ…
б‰Ѓ ЬёаЇњаЇЎ Ьґ б‰ЂЬґ аµ…
б‰Ѓ
ЬёаЇњаЇЎ Ьґ
ЬёаЇњаЇЎ Ьґ
߱‫ܥ‬
߱‫ܥ‬
ൌ ‫ ܴܫ‬ൌ
аµЊ
.
аµЊ
ଶ
Э†
Э†
Э†
ቀܴ − ߱‫ ܥ‬ቁ ቀܴ − ߱‫ ܥ‬ቁ ቀܴ ൅ ߱‫ ܥ‬ቁ ቆܴ ଶ ൅ ቀ 1 ቁ ቇ
߱‫ܥ‬
Rearranged this gives
ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§
ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§
ЬёаЇњаЇЎ
аµЊ
Э†
Ьґ
б‰ЂЬґ в€’
б‰Ѓ
߱‫ܥ‬
The amplitude of the output (usually of most interest) is given by:
ଵ⁄ଶ
1
ሺܸ௜௡ ܴሻଶ ቀܴ ଶ ൅ ଶ ଶ ቁ‫ۊ‬
‫ۇ‬
Я±
‫ܥ‬
∗ ሻଵ⁄ଶ
|ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ | аµЊ б€єЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§ ЬёаЇўаЇЁаЇ§
ൌ‫ۈ‬
ଶ
‫ۋ‬
1 ଶ
ଶ
ቆܴ ൅ ቀ ቁ ቇ
߱‫ܥ‬
‫ۉ‬
‫ی‬
ЬёаЇњаЇЎ Ьґ
ܸ௜௡ ܴ߱‫ܥ‬
аµЊ
аµЊ
ሺሺܴ߱‫ܥ‬ሻଶ ൅ 1ሻଵ⁄ଶ
ଶ ଵ⁄ଶ
1
ଶ
ቆܴ ൅ ቀ߱‫ ܥ‬ቁ ቇ
Phasor diagrams
These are an alternative to the Argand diagram of figure 1 to represent such time varying
voltages and currents and are used in Halliday and Resnick (chapters 16 and 31). Figures
may appear very similar to figure 2, however, the vectors rotates anticlockwise with
constant angular velocity corresponding to the angular frequency of the quantity involved.
The length of the vectors is equal to the amplitude of the quantity and the instantaneous
value of a quantity is represented by the projection onto the vertical axis.
91
Experiment 18: Optical Diffraction
Safety Aspects: You must take great care when using the laser to avoid damage to your
eyes. In no circumstances must you look along the main beam. You must also take care
that specularly reflected beams do not enter your eye when you are adjusting the various
components. Check with a demonstrator before starting the experiment.
Before coming to the lab, remind yourself about optical diffraction. Use an A level
reference or read some of Chapter 36 (p990) of The Wiley Plus “Principles of Physics”.
Outline
In optics, Fraunhofer (or far-field) diffraction is a form of wave diffraction that occurs
when field waves are passed through an aperture or slit. In this experiment you will study
quantitatively and qualitatively various diffracting objects and their diffraction patterns,
by using a laser as a source of monochromatic light and a series of apertures, aligned on
an optical bench.
Experimental skills
• Using a HeNe laser, and taking relevant safety considerations.
• Careful experimental alignment and set-up using an optical bench.
• Making use of observations and trial/survey experiments (as mentioned in Experiment
3) prior to taking detailed measurements.
Wider Applications
• Any real optical system (a microscope, a telescope, a camera) contains finite sized
components and apertures. These give rise to diffraction effects and fundamentally
limit the obtainable resolution of any optical device. (There may be other optical
imperfections too, such as scratches or misalignment.)
• Thus, the resolution of a given instrument is proportional to the size of its objective,
and inversely proportional to the wavelength of the light being observed.
• An optical system with the ability to produce images with angular resolution as good
as the instrument's theoretical limit is said to be diffraction limited. In astronomy, a
diffraction-limited observation is achievable with space-based telescopes, of suitable
size.
1. Introduction
Diffraction is the name given to the modification of a wavefront as it passes through some
region in which there is a diffracting object. The object is usually an obstacle or an
aperture in an opaque sheet of material. Huygens’ Principle postulates that all points on
the modified wavefront act as secondary sources of radiation. According to Figure 1, at
any point P beyond the object the secondary waves superpose, or interfere, to give a
resulting disturbance which is characteristic of the diffracting object. This resulting
disturbance is usually referred to as the diffraction pattern of the object, although
interference pattern would be a better name.
92
Figure 1: Diffraction through a slit
The form of the diffraction pattern also depends on the distance, D, of the observation
plane from the object. Diffraction effects can be divided conveniently into two
categories.
(1) Near-field, or Fresnel diffraction, for which D is fairly small
(2) Far-field, or Fraunhofer diffraction, for which D >> a 2 , where a is the size of
О»
diffracting unit and О» is the wavelength of the scattered radiation.
In this experiment you will be concerned only with Fraunhofer diffraction effects. The
experiment consists of studying, either quantitatively or qualitatively or both, various
diffracting objects and their diffraction patterns.
2. Experimental set-up and adjustment of the apparatus
2.1 The laser
The source of radiation is a 1 mW helium-neon (HeNe) laser which emits a coherent
beam of light of approximately 4 mm2 cross-sectional area.
Switch on the laser and adjust it so that the beam is travelling parallel to the longitudinal
axis of the optical bench. Make a crude adjustment first by standing back and using your
eye to judge how parallel the the axis of the laser is to the optical bench. Then, fine
adjustment can be made by checking the beam position on a piece of white card as it is
moved along the optical bench. Hold the white card in one of the holders provided and
check that the beam strikes the card at the same point, which may be marked with a cross,
wherever along the bench it is. Make adjustments using the vertical and transverse fine
adjustment knobs on the laser baseplate. Don’t spend too much time doing this; if you’re
having trouble, talk to a demonstrator.
93
2.2 Objects and holder
Mount the three-jaw slide holder in a saddle positioned close to the laser.
You are provided with a series of mounted 2” x 2” slides, etched into which are various
diffracting objects. These slides are unprotected and must only be handled by their edges
to avoid damage.
SLIDE 1
SLIDE 2
SLIDE 3
SLIDE 4
SLIDE 5
Diffacting object(s)
One-dimensional diffraction grating.
Double slits
A series of single slits of different widths.
Two-dimensional diffraction grating.
One-dimensional diffraction grating
3. Measurement of the width of the central peak
Place slide 3 in the slide holder and mount it close to the laser at one end of the bench.
Adjust it horizontally until the light is passing through slit C and displaying a clear
diffraction pattern on the wall. Always look along the bench, away from the laser when
making adjustments.
Measure the distance, D, between the slide and the wall. Observe the pattern on the wall
and sketch it, to scale, in your lab book. Is the pattern what you expect? What is the
diffracting object?
Accurately measure the width of the central peak, W.
The peak width W is given by:
W = Kan,
[1]
where K depends on D and О» , and a is the width of the slit (Figure 6.1). Repeat this
measurement for slits D, E, F and G. Compare the width of the central peak with the slit
widths, which are given in Вµm , on the packet containing the slides. (Record all
measurements in metres!) Rearrange equation [1] so that a plot of W as a function of a
will give you a straight line graph and, using appropriate graph paper, plot a graph to find
the integer n. What do you think is the relationship between K, D and О» ? (Hint: use
dimensional analysis to work it out and then refer to the literature to check the correct
equation.)
4. Determination of the wavelength of the laser light
Now use SLIDE 1 to obtain the diffraction pattern as illustrated in Figure 2. Using the
travelling microscope and the Rayleigh mean method (if in doubt, ask a demonstrator),
determine the repeat distance d of this one-dimensional grating. Place the slide in the
slide holder so that the grating is illuminated by the laser and the diffracted beams lie
approximately in a horizontal plane. Maximise the size of this pattern so that you can
94
easily determine the zeroth order (centre) and as many higher orders as possible. Sketch
and describe the pattern.
Now, by careful experimental measurement it should be possible to determine the
wavelength of the laser light.
The wavelength О» of the light from the laser is given by
О»=
d sin Оё m
,
m
[2]
where the angle Оёm is indicated in Figure 2
Figure 2: Defining d and Оёm
Because Оёm is small, sin Оё m = tan Оё m =
О»=
x ( m)
, and [2] becomes
D
d x ( m)
D m
[3]
Note x(m) is the distance between the centre of the pattern and the mth diffraction spot.
Rearrange the equation to plot a suitable straight line graph in order to determine О» , the
wavelength of the HeNe laser. Check that your answer is sensible!
5. Two dimensional grating
SLIDE 4, is a two-dimensional diffraction grating. Use any convenient diffraction
method to find the ratio of the repeat distances in the two principal directions.
Remember to sketch your observations and discuss.
95
Experiment 19: Measurement of e/m.
Introduction
This experiment, devised by J.J. Thompson in 1897, allows the ratio of the charge, e, of
an electron to its mass, m, to be measured using a cathode ray tube. This is done by
producing a beam of electrons (so-called cathode rays) in the form of a narrow ribbon
from an electron gun in an evacuated glass bulb. The electron beam is intercepted by a flat
mica sheet, one side of which is coated with a luminescent screen and the other side is
printed with a centimetre graticule. By this means the path followed by the electrons is
made visible.
There are two basic methods by which e/m may be determined with the cathode ray tube.
They are both based on the equations describing the forces exerted by electric and
magnetic fields on moving charged particles. You will try both methods.
In both methods, the beam of electrons emitted by the filament passes from right to left to
strike the mica screen. We need an expression for the speed, v, of the electrons in terms of
the accelerating voltage, Va, between the filament and anode. If the electrons are emitted
from the filament with zero kinetic energy and move in a good vacuum, their kinetic
energy is just given by
mv 2
= eVa
(1)
2
so that v can be found. We shall use this expression later.
Figure 1: Schematic diagram of apparatus
96
Take care! High voltages and delicate evacuated glassware are used in these experiments.
PLEASE READ YOUR
LABORATORIES" SHEET
"CODE
OF
PRACTICE
FOR
TEACHlNG
Method I - Electrostatic and Magnetic Deflection
In this method, the lower deflector plate is connected to the point marked I in Figure 1.
A magnetic field B is applied with "Helmholtz coils" (described below). If this magnetic
field points out of the plane of the diagram, there will be a downward force on the
electrons (use Fleming's left-hand rule) equal to
Fmagnetic = Bev
where e is electron charge and v is their speed. At the same time, by connecting the plates
so as to put a voltage VP across them (see diagram) an upward electrostatic force can be
applied to the electrons, equal to
Felectric = Ee = V P
e
d
where E is the electric field between the plates and d is their distance apart. In this
experiment, E and B are adjusted so that there is no net deflection of the electron beam, so
that the magnetic and electric forces must balance:
VP
e
= Bev
d
and this gives, with equation (1), an expression for e/m
V P2
e
=
m 2 B 2Va d 2
In fact, with the connections as shown, because the lower deflector plate is connected to
the cathode while the upper plate is connected to the anode, the plate voltage is equal to
the accelerating voltage, VP = Va, so that the previous equation simplifies to
Va
e
=
m 2B 2 d 2
97
Procedure
For a range of anode voltages, adjust the current through the Helmholtz coils to reduce the
electron deflection to zero. The magnetic field in each case is calculated as described
below. Tabulate your values of Va, I and B. Plot Va against B2 and hence determine e/m.
Estimate the precision of all your measurements and results. What do you think are the
main sources of error? Your graph should, of course, be a straight line passing through the
origin . Comment on any deviation from this.
Method II - Magnetic Deflection onlv
In this method, the lower deflector plate is connected to the point marked II in Figure 1
This means that the deflector plates are effectively not used in this experiment.
If no compensating electric field is applied, the electron beam will be deflected into a
circular path of radius r. Equating the magnetic force causing the deflection to the
centripetal force gives
Bev =
mv 2
r
Combining this with equation (1) therefore gives
2V
e
= 2 a2
m B r
The advantage of this method is that it does not depend on deflection plates. It is very
difficult to make deflection plates which have a sufficiently uniform electric field between
them, and this leads to a systematic error in the determination of e/m.
The only disadvantage of using this formula is that the value of r must be measured. To
do this you can use the following relation for circles passing through the origin (which is
at the exit aperture of the anode) and the points (x, В±y) on the graticule:
(x
r=
2
+ y2
2y
)
(Note: The origin of the graticule in some tubes is not exactly at the anode and a
correction should therefore be made).
Derive the above equation.
Procedure
As in the first method, choose several values of anode voltage. It is then easiest to adjust
the current through the Helmholtz coils to produce a particular, easily measurable, radius
of the electron beam path. For example, you could make the beam always pass through
98
the point (10.0, В±2.6) cm. The magnetic field is calculated as described below. Note down
the values of x, В± y and r and tabulate your values of Va, В± I, В± B. Estimate the precision of
all your measurements and results. Plot Va against B2. Choose another value of r and
repeat. Repeat for further positive and negative values of r (To get both positive and
negative deflections, you will need to reverse the Helmholtz coil current). Calculate e/m
for each r and compare and comment on your results.
Helmholtz Coils
The magnetic field acting on the electrons is provided by a so-called Helmholtz pair of
coils each of a radius R, with their centres separated by a distance equal to their radius R.
Such a configuration gives a substantially uniform magnetic field in the central region of
the coils. The magnetic field B can be calculated from the formula
3
пЈ« 4 пЈ¶ 2 Вµ NI
B=пЈ¬ пЈ· 0
R
пЈ­5пЈё
or B ≈
0.716Вµ 0 NI
R
where Вµ0 = 1.26 x 10-6 TmA-1 (or 4ПЂ x 10-7 henry metre-1)
N = number of turns on each coil (320 turns of 22 swg enamelled copper wire in this
case).
I = current through the coils in ampere.
The mean coil diameter is 13.6 cm in this case, so R = 0.068 m.
The start of each coil is connected to the 4mm socket (A) on the side of the coil bobbin,
and the finish to the 4mm socket (Z). For this experiment, in order that the field of the
coils should add, connect the power supply to sockets A, with sockets Z interconnected.
DO NOT EXCEED A COIL CURRENT OF l.5A FOR MORE THAN 10
MINUTES. FOR LONGER PERIODS OF TIME, DO NOT EXCEED 1.0A.
99
Experiment 20: X-rays
1. Introduction
Safety Aspects: Intense X-ray beams are harmful to human tissue. The protective cover of
the equipment is interlocked such that the X-ray beam is switched off when the cover is
opened.
THE CRYSTALS ARE FRAGILE - TREAT THEM WITH CARE.
X-rays are electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength than light. X-rays have
wavelengths of about 0.1 nm whereas light has wavelengths of about 500 nm. X-radiation
has many important uses, for example study of the structure of solids. The use of X-rays
for this purpose will be explored in Semester 2. However, in this experiment some of the
properties of X-rays and their interaction with matter are studied.
The experiment consists of the following parts.
(a) Measurement of the X-radiation spectrum emitted by a copper-target X-ray tube.
(b) Study of the effect of passage through the foils of various elements on the emission
spectrum of the X-ray tube.
(c) Measurement of the absorption characteristics of various elements.
The wavelength of electromagnetic radiation is usually measured by means of a
diffraction grating. In order to obtain reasonable angles of diffraction the spacing of the
grating elements must be of the same order of size as the wavelength of the radiation. The
spacing of the atoms in simple crystals are typically of the order of 0.1 nm and the
electrons in the atoms scatter the X-rays. Consequently simple crystals make convenient
diffraction gratings for X-rays. The grating in this experiment is a crystal of sodium
chloride cut in the form of a plate. The atomic-scale structure of sodium chloride consists
of alternate sodium and chlorine ions arranged in a face-centred cubic arrangement. The
arrangement of ions and its orientation with respect to the plane of the crystal plate used
here is shown in Figure 1, where a is the basic cube repeat distance.
Figure 1: Arrangement of ions in plate of sodium chloride
100
The relation between the spacing of the ions for the above arrangement, the wavelength О»
of the X-rays and the angle 2Оё of diffraction is
mО» = 2a sinОё
(1)
where m is the order of diffraction. For the face-centred-cubic arrangement of sodium
chloride the lowest non-zero-intensity order of diffraction (other than m = 0) is m = 2 and
only even orders are possible.
2. The X-ray apparatus
This consists mainly of a copper-anode X-ray tube, specimen holder and detector carriage
enclosed in an X-ray proof housing (Figure 2).
.
Figure 2: The X-ray apparatus
The white indicator light indicates power on (mainly the supply to the X-ray tube
filament); the red indicator, and the audible warning, indicate high voltage and X-rays on.
The X-rays can be produced only when the X-ray-proof cover is closed. The whole
apparatus is interlocked and is entirely safe. Its use will be outlined by the demonstrator.
3. Measurement of the X-ray tube emission spectrum
The wavelength of the X-rays is measured by measuring the angle 2Оё at which they are
diffracted in the second order (the lowest non-zero-intensity order) from the sodium
chloride crystal. For sodium chloride a = 0.564 nm, and for m = 2, so show that equation
(1) becomes
О» = 0.564sinОё (nm)
(2)
101
Clamp the sodium chloride crystal in the specimen holder (Figure 2) with its long axis
vertical and with the largest ground face of the crystal in the X-ray beam. Insert the 1 mm
slit primary-beam collimator into the X-ray tube housing with the slit vertical and place
the 1 mm slit diffracted-beam collimator in the detector carriage position 18. View the
crystal face, and the primary-beam collimator slot, through the slit in the diffracted-beam
collimator. If necessary, rotate the primary-beam collimator until its slit is parallel to that
of the diffracted-beam collimator and to the crystal face.
Place the circular-aperture slide in detector carriage position 17 and the Geiger-Muller
detector in its holder in position 26 (Figure 3)
Figure 3: Plan view of component arrangement
Set the scaler unit high voltage to 400 V. Move the detector carriage from 25В° to 40В° in
steps of 1В° between 25-28В°, 1/6В° between 28-33В° and 1В° between 33-40В°. The 1/6В° steps
can be made with the thumb wheel. At each position count for 10s and record the count
and angular position 2Оё (Figure 4). Use Poisson statistics to estimate the random count
error and remember to subtract the systematic error due to the background radiation count
by making counts away from a peak or with no source on.
Figure 4: Plan view of arrangement during measurement of count rate
102
Plot the count against 2Оё to give the spectrum. It will be seen that this consists of a
general background of radiation with two prominent peaks. The longer-wavelength peak
is called the KО± line, the shorter is the KОІ line. Calculate their wavelengths.
What do the peaks represent? What are the widths of the peaks? What might cause this
width?
4. Characteristic X-ray spectra
X-ray spectra can be considered to arise from transitions between energy levels
characterized by a quantum number nl and levels with quantum number n2. The energy
associated with each level is given by
En =
Rhc( Z в€’ Пѓ ) 2
n2
where:
R is a universal constant 1.0968 x l07 m-1;
Z is the atomic number, which for Cu = 29;
h = 6.626 x 10-34 Js;
Пѓ is the screening constant.
This relationship is identical to that which is applied to the hydrogen spectrum apart from
the appearance of the screening constant. This arises because, unlike the case of hydrogen
where there is only one electron, a given electron experiences a field due to the charge on
the nucleus modified by the field due to the other electrons.
The energy emitted when the atom changes from a state defined by n1 to that defined by
n2 is observed as a quantum of frequency П… such that
пЈ®1
1пЈ№
∆E = hν = Rhc( Z − σ ) 2  2 − 2 
пЈ° n2 n1 пЈ»
The KО± line results from a change of n from 2 to 1; the KОІ line results from n = 3 to 1.
Use your wavelength data to do the following.
(a) Calculate values for Пѓ for the Cu transitions. Comment on any differences you
observe.
(b) Draw an energy-level diagram for copper (lines separated by a distance proportional to
the energy separation and clearly labelled). Use Пѓ calculated for KОІ. What energy would
be needed to remove an innermost electron entirely from a copper atom?
The K series of lines are so-called because the final state is the n=1 or K shell of the atom.
Other shells exist for n = 2, 3 etc and are called the L,M, etc shells.
The L series of lines results from transitions which finish at n = 2, so that the LО± line is
produced when n = 3 в†’ n = 2.
What wavelength would you predict for this line? (Ignore the screening effect). Could you
detect such radiation with your apparatus? [Consider equations 1 and 2].
103
5. Effect of Passage through Foils
When X-radiation passes through a foil its intensity is reduced according to the equation
I x = I 0 exp(в€’ Вµx)
where:
Вµ is the linear absorption coefficient;
x is the thickness of the foil;
I0 is the incident intensity;
Ix is the transmitted intensity.
Replace the circular aperture slide in the detector carriage position 17 by a copper foil and
determine the magnitude of Вµ for absorption of (a) KО± and (b) KОІ radiation.
6. X-ray Absorption edqes
The absorption coefficient is heavily dependent on the wavelength of the X-rays. This can
be best understood if we consider the physics of the absorption process.
As X-rays pass through matter they interact with the atoms and lose energy. The main
energy-loss process is ionization. The X-rays interact with the electrons which are bound
to atoms of the absorber and lose the energy which is required to remove the electrons
from the atom. This process is described by
hОЅ ' = hОЅ в€’ B.E.
where П…' is the frequency of the X-rays after absorption; П… is the incident frequency
and B.E. is the “binding” energy required to ionize the electron concerned.
Thus the energy lost in any one such ionization process will depend on:
a) the absorbing atomic species;
b) the shell from which the electron is removed as the B.E. for an electron n, say, the L
shell will differ from that for an electron in the K shell.
Consider a simple case where X-rays pass through an absorber which is composed of
atoms which have electrons only in the K and L shells. X-rays of the smallest energies
(lowest frequency, largest wavelength) will be heavily absorbed by ionizing electrons in
the L shell, but will not have enough energy to ionize electrons in the K shell. This
process is described by
hОЅ ' = hОЅ в€’ E L
where EL is the B.E. of the electron in L shell.
If the energy of the X-rays is increased, the X-rays become more penetrating and the
magnitude of the absorption coefficient falls rapidly. In general, Вµ в€ќ О»3, so that the
variation is as shown in figure 5.
104
Figure 5: Variation of absorption coefficient with wavelength and frequency.
At a certain critical frequency (and equivalent wavelength), the X-ray energy has been
increased to such an extent that the X-rays are now able to ionize not only electrons in the
L shell, but also electrons in the K shell. Thus the absortion coefficient increases very
rapidly as shown in figure 6.
Figure 6: Variation of absorption coefficient with wavelength and frequency
for two transitions
This discontinuity is termed a K absorption edge and will occur at well defined
wavelengths which are characteristic of the absorber concerned. To a good approximation
the frequency П…K associated with the K absorption edge is given by
hОЅ K = EK ,
where EK is the binding energy of the electron in the K shell. Similar absorption edges
may occur for L,M, etc shells.
Where on a wavelength scale would you expect to find the copper K absorption edge in
relationship to the О± and ОІ lines? Is this supported by your values for the linear absorption
coefficients?
Determine the position of the copper absorption edge. Insert the copper foil in position 17
and investigate the intensity of transmitted radiation over a wide range of angles.
Plot log10 (I0/Ix ) against 2Оё and hence determine the position and wavelength of the edge.
How does this compare with your estimate in 4(b)?
105
Experiment 21: Microwaves
Safety
Although the microwave power used in this experiment is very low students should take
care not to look directly into the source when it is switched on.
The resistor mounted on the back of the transmitter does get hot after extended use.
Outline
The properties of waves in general and electromagnetic waves in particular are examined
by using microwaves of wavelength ~2.8 cm. The properties examined include
polarization, diffraction and interference. The interference experiments are similar to
those performed with visible light at much shorter wavelengths (and sound with similar
wavelengths). However, the macroscopic wavelength of microwaves is exploited to
reveal behaviour not readily accessible at short wavelengths, in particular phase changes
on reflection and edge diffraction effects.
Experimental skills
• Experience of handling microwave radiation, sources and detectors.
• Experience of polarized electromagnetic radiation.
Wider Applications
• Microwave radiation is used in communications, astronomy, radar and cooking.
Mobile phones use two frequency bands at ~ 950 MHz and ~18850 MHz.
Astronomy - the cosmic microwave background radiation peaks at О»= 1.9 mm.
Microwave ovens use a frequency of 2.45 GHz wavelength of 12.2 cm. The
oscillating electric field interacts with the electric dipole in water molecules so that
they rotate, have more energy and so get “hotter”. Since water molecules in solid
form cannot rotate ice is an inefficient absorber of microwave radiation.
• The manipulation of polarization is an important way to exploit electromagnetic
radiation. This is not restricted to plane polarization. For example “circularly”
polarized light is exploited in the latest 3D films shown at cinemas.
• Electromagnetic radiation detection is common to many branches of physics. For
example with an array of detectors similar to the ones used here and some optics
astronomical imaging becomes possible – this is a very active research area within this
School.
Equipment List: Microwave generator, two detectors (point probe and horn), Multimeter (using mV or V scale, depending on equipment), metal plates and grid.
1. Introduction
The name “microwave” is generally given to that part of the electromagnetic spectrum
with wavelengths in the approximate range 1mm - 100 cm (10-3-1 m). This compares
with the visible region with wavelengths of 4 to 8 x 10-7 m. Microwaves therefore have a
wavelength which is >20,000 times longer than light waves. Because of this difference it
is easier in many cases to demonstrate the wave properties of electromagnetic radiation
using microwaves.
106
1.1 Electromagnetic Waves
An electromagnetic wave is a transverse variation of electric and magnetic fields as
shown in figure 1 and travels through space with the velocity of light (3 x 108 m s-1).
Because it is a transverse wave it can be “polarized”, meaning that there is a definite
orientation for their oscillations. As shown in Figure 1 an electromagnetic wave is
composed of electric and magnetic fields oscillating at right angles. The direction of
polarization is defined to be the direction in which the electric field is vibrating. (This is
an arbitrary matter; the magnetic field could equally well have been chosen to define the
direction of polarization). Plane polarized radiation means that the electric field (or the
magnetic field) oscillates in one direction only.
Figure 1 The electric and magnetic fields in an electromagnetic wave. E is the electric field strength, B the
-1
magnetic flux density. The wave propagates with a velocity of 3 x 108 m s .
The microwave transmitter provided emits monochromatic plane polarized radiation. A
normal light source is a mixture of many different directions of polarization so that its
average polarization is zero.
An electric field is defined in terms of both an amplitude and direction and is therefore a
vector. It is useful to think of polarized radiation in terms of vectors. The detectors of
(microwave) electromagnetic radiation used in this experiment are polarization sensitive
(some are not). In this case the relative orientation of the transmitter (and electric field)
and the detector (receiver) is important and is illustrated in Figure 2.
Electric field
direction of polarised
electromagnetic
radiation
orientation of
polarisation sensitive
detector
Оё
Figure 2. Plane polarised radiation incident at an angle Оё with respect to the sensitive direction of the
detector.
In Figure 2, if the amplitude of the electric field of the incident radiation is E0 the
component that is experienced by the detector is E0cosОё. Some detectors give an output
107
that is proportional to the amplitude of electric field, however many have an output
proportional to the intensity, I (or power). Intensity is proportional to the square of the
electric field, so for an aligned field and detector
I = I0 = kEo2
whereas at an angle, Оё,
I = kEo2cos2Оё = Iocos2Оё.
From the above, the angular dependence of the signal is capable of revealing something
about how the detector/receiver used operates.
“Diffraction” and “interference” both relate to the superposition of waves and are
essentially the same physical effect. Custom and practice dictates which term is used in a
particular circumstance. The essential principles should be familiar to 1st year physics
students and will not be repeated here.
2. Experimental
2.1 Apparatus: The Microwave Equipment
• The transmitter incorporating a Gunn diode in a waveguide and a horn gives plane
polarized* radiation and is operated at 10 V, fed by a power supply.
• There are two receivers*, one is a feed horn receiver the other is a probe.
• The feed horn receiver is the most sensitive and is both polarization dependent* and
directional.
• The probe is non-directional, but is still polarization dependent and is less sensitive.
• The receivers are connected to a voltmeter on its mV range.
*The polarization of the transmitter and horn receiver is vertical if the writing on the back
of the units is horizontal. The probe receiver placed supported by its stand on the bench is
sensitive to vertically polarized radiation.
Important:
• Reminder: Do not look into the transmitter when it is turned on.
• Neither receiver should be placed nearer than 10 cm from the transmitter.
• Stray reflections are a big problem when undertaking microwave experiments.
To minimise these, the experiment should be carried out on the top level of the
bench and all objects (bags, hands and arms etc) should be kept out of the beam
whilst taking measurements.
2.2. Standing waves and the determination of wavelength
To create a stationary (standing) wave a reflecting surface is placed in the path of a
progressive wave to reflect the wave along its own path. The resulting waveform should
be similar to that shown in Figure 3 where the distance between successive nodes (or
antinodes) is half a wavelength.
108
Antinode
/2
E
_
Node
Incident wave velocity c
Reflected wave velocity c
Figure 3. Depiction of the standing waves set up when a wave is reflected off a surface.
•
•
•
•
The (aluminium) reflector plate should be approximately 1 metre from the microwave
source.
Place the probe in the region of the standing waves and move the reflector plate either
towards or away from the transmitter. (A very similar experiment can be performed
by moving the detector with the reflector plate fixed.)
The probe will pass through the wave form given in Figure 3 and when the probe is
connected to the meter in the receiver it will display successive maxima and minima.
Determine the wavelength of the microwave, by recording the position of several
maxima and plotting a graph of distance versus maxima (the slope will give a value
for half a wavelength). Does the wavelength agree with the value written on the back
of the transmitter horn?
2.3 Plane polarised electromagnetic radiation
This section consists of a number of experiments to reveal the behaviour of the
microwave source and receivers/detectors as well as some of the properties of plane
polarized radiation.
Plane polarization and receiver sensitivities
• Position the transmitter and horn receiver 0.5 m apart with both oriented for vertically
polarized radiation. Align the transmitter and detector by maximising the signal and
make a note of the signal.
• The polarization of the emitted radiation and polarized sensitivity of the receiver can
be demonstrated by rotating the transmitter through 90o. Find the minimum possible
signal and record it.
• Repeat for the probe receiver and compare the properties of the two receivers.
• Return the transmitter and horn to their vertical position. Place the large metal grid
between the two, rotate it and observe the variation in the received signal. What effect
does the grid have? Why?
Detection of polarized radiation: angular dependence
Either by using the metal grid or by rotation of the transmitter, deduce the dependence of
the measured power on the angle of polarization. (This may be quite tricky.)
• Find a suitable way of measuring the angle of rotation and vary this in 15 degree steps
from 0 o to 180 o. Record the measured signal.
• Tabulate the signal measurements along with the expected values for cosθ and cos2θ
dependencies. What do the results imply?
109
2.4 Demonstration of interference effects
This part of the experiment builds up a microwave analogue of the single slit optical
interference experiments. By concentrating on the straight through beam the experiment
complements optical diffraction experiments. The general arrangement is shown in
Figure 4.
A
transmitter
to meter on
receiver
x
A'
Figure 4. Schematic of the experimental arrangement for interference from a single slit (the transmitter is
shown relatively much closer to the slit than is required)
The experiment is performed in four parts whilst keeping the distance between the front of
the transmitter and the plane AA’ constant (at ~0.6 m). This will allow all results to be
compared.
(i) No slits in place
This section gives an indication of the spread of microwaves emitted from the source.
•
•
•
Position a 1 m rule on the bench top to provide an indication of position in the AA’
plane.
Moving the probe in 2 cm steps between measurements, take 8 measurements either
side of the centre line, i.e. 17 measurements in all.
Plot the data. Note: The graph shows the distribution of microwave power in the
“beam” emitted from the transmitter.
(ii) Single slit: variable slit width probe fixed in straight through position
This section investigates the effect of slit width on the straight through beam.
•
•
•
Position the two large plates equidistant from the front of the transmitter and the plane
AA’, with a slit width of 3 cm.
Keeping the centre of the slit on the line between transmitter and probe, take
measurements as the separation of the plates (width of the slit) is increased in 2 cm
steps up to ~21 cm and then in 1 cm steps up to ~35 cm.
Plot the data and compare with (i).
Note: The above results have all the hallmarks of interference.
(iii) Single plate: variable plate position, probe fixed in straight through position
110
This section seeks to provide an explanation for the results found in (ii).
•
•
•
Position one large plate as above but with one of its edges directly in the line of sight
between the source and the detector. Make a note of this position and then move it
across a further 5 cm to obscure the detector.
From this starting position take readings as the probe is moved out of the beam. Take
readings every ~2 cm for the first 10 cm and every 1 cm for the final 10 cm (20 cm
movement in total). (You can always add more readings if you need to.)
Plot the data and consider whether two such single plates can explain the results in
(ii).
Note: There is very little scattering of radiation behind the plate.
The origin of interference
If all has gone well, the two plate/single slit the interference behaviour of the straight
through beam can now be understood to arise from the addition of the effect of two single
plates. The single plate behaviour is better considered to be an example of “straight edge
diffraction” where the straight through beam from the emitter interferes with a secondary
source of radiation reflected from the edge of the plate.
As the plate is moved away from the centre line the path difference, between the straight
through and reflected beams, increases. From this argument it might be expected that the
first turning point, corresponding to a path difference of О»/2 (phase difference of ПЂ), would
be a minimum, whereas clearly it is a maximum. This is explained by the reflection at the
edge producing a (negative) phase shift in the re-emitted radiation.
•
If you have time, use Pythagoras theorem to determine the phase shift** caused by
reflection at the edge. See Appendix at end.
** A simple reflection (as in 2.2) would be expected to result in a -ПЂ phase shift, however
with this geometry the Gouy effect is reported to result in a further -ПЂ/4 phase shift giving
a total of -3ПЂ/4.
(iv) Single slit diffraction pattern: fixed width
This section seeks to illustrate the fundamental equivalence of light and microwaves by
generating a (familiar) single slit diffraction pattern.
•
•
Position the two large plates as in (ii) but with a separation of 11 cm.
Moving the probe in 2 cm steps between measurements, take 8 measurements either
side of the centre line, i.e. 17 measurements in all.
• Plot the data and compare the first minimum with its expected position (given λ = 2.8
cm).
(Note: Here due to diffraction, minima are expected at nО» = d.sinОё, where d is the slit
width.)
Appendix
The experimental arrangement is shown in figure 5 where the source is considered to be a
point - a parallel beam would be more appropriate for a visible laser/edge arrangement.
The distance from plane of sheet to the source and detector is the same.
111
Source
L
d
Metal sheet
Оґ
Detector
Figure 5. Schematic of experimental arrangement for edge interference. The paths for microwaves
travelling directly between source and detector and via the edge are shown.
The geometric path difference (found using Pythagoras) is 2Оґ where
Оґ = (d 2 + L2 )1 2 в€’ L
Extrema (i.e. maxima and minima) in intensity occur, taking into account the Gouy effect
when:
(m в€’ 1)О» / 2 = 2(d 2 + L2 )1 2 в€’ 2 L в€’ 3О» / 8
where m is a positive integer. Note half wavelength path lengths give alternating max and
min and so the “extrema”.
112
Experiment 22: Computer Error Simulations and Analysis
Outline
The autumn semester introduced random errors (from repeated measurement and from
straight line graphs) and the propagation of errors (through techniques of partial
differentials and adding in “quadrature”). Having used these concepts for a while, this
session revisits the underlying concepts using new and existing Python computing skills.
Experimental (and computing) skills
• Understanding the statistical analysis of data.
• Use of statistical computing tools.
Wider Applications
This experiment illustrates the unseen statistics behind all practical physics
• In advanced applications the statistical analysis of data is all handled by computers.
• This section explores the nature of least squares fitting and provides an introduction to
alternative numerical approaches.
1. Introduction
The experiment “Statistics of experimental data (Gaussian Distribution)” performed
during the autumn semester (PX1123) introduced you to some of the underlying
foundations of the analysis of random errors. Here the subject is revisited. But, by
making use of a computer (and Python programming), to both generate and analyse data
much faster progress can be made. After reconsidering the error associated with repeated
measurements of a single point, the session moves on to consider the treatment of error
propagation (the combination of errors) and the “least squares” analysis of straight line
data.
Session
1. Evolution of errors with repeated measurement with a normal distribution.
2. Error propagation (making sense of adding in quadrature)
3. The statistics of straight line graphs
Quick Reminder: the nature of experimental measurements (see section III.2 of
PX1123 lab manual for full treatments)
• Repeated measurements usually result in a normal distribution around a mean value.
• With a reasonably large number of repeats “standard errors” represent the uncertainty
in determined values.
• For y(x) when x is varied the data points can be considered as very similar to repeats
with the points distributed above and below the “best fit line”.
2. Experiments
It will be a good idea to have access to the website during the course of the session.
This should be one of your “favourites” but if it is not:
https://alexandria.astro.cf.ac.uk/Joomla-python/
Quick Python reminder – relevant syntax is present in week 2 and 3 (Arrays, Vector
Algebra and Graph Plotting) of the taught computing course.
2.1. Normal/Gaussian statistics of repeated measurements
Section 2.1 will be based on the simulation of repeated measurements of two timed
events, A and B both measured with a stopwatch.
113
Suppose that:
• For the sake of the simulations the true values of A and B are 2.0 s and 3.0 s exactly.
• The standard deviation* that characterises both measurements is 0.2 s.
*The standard deviation parameterises the spread in values that are obtained and so is also
said to characterise (parameterise) the precision of the measurement.
2.1.1 Distributions for A and B
The first step is to create arrays of points for A and B randomly generated from ideal
normal distributions. The first point in each array then corresponds to the first
measurement etc. Provided these arrays are only created once the subsequent analysis can
be cross compared.
To achieve this arrays for A and B will be created in the Spyder console. This does not
exclude creating programmes in the editor because they can (and are normally) executed
in the console and so can call on arrays that exist there.
Creating arrays
This will be done using the normal() function. As given in the object explorer the
defaults for this are:
normal(loc=0,scale = 1.0,size =1 value)
where loc is the mean value of the distribution, scale is the standard deviation and size is
the number of points.
Do the following:
• Create n = 1000 point arrays for A and B (labelled as A and B)
• Create and print out a single (20 bin is appropriate) histogram including both A and B
and comment on the range of values for each and any overlap between the
distributions.
• Perform a statistical analysis of A to find the mean, standard deviation and standard
error.
• Transfer these to the editor and save the code as a (very) simple programme – it is
worth it as it will be used a few times today. Since this runs in the “Console” it can
call on the A array generated earlier. Do not write a function to generate A in the
programme as this will overwrite it.
• Change the array name in the programme to analyse the B array.
• Consider the appropriate parameter to use as the errors in A and B, state their values
(with errors – as usual) and state whether they agree with the accepted/known values
of A and B.
2.1.2 Error propagation (adding in quadrature)
Students have been required to combine errors based on the outcomes of partial
differentiation (which hopefully makes sense) and addition in quadrature (which hasn’t
yet been justified).
The aim here is to justify the addition in quadrature.
The addition and multiplication of two values (A and B) will be considered and their
errors will be taken to be their standard deviations.
(A large number of points (n) will be used so standard errors are more appropriate
however since the two are linked by a factor of (n-1)0.5 this will not affect the
interpretation or error propagation).
114
Addition of A and B (Sum, S=A+B)
Reminder: error propagation for P = A + B
Partial differentiation gives
а°ЎаЇЊ
а°Ўа®є
аµЊ1
а°ЎаЇЊ
а°Ўа®»
and
аµЊ1
Or
߲ܵ ൌ ߲‫ܣ‬
and
߲ܵ ൌ ߲‫ܤ‬
Combining the ߲ܲ (or ∆P) contributions in quadrature gives the familiar
ሺ∆ܵሻଶ ൌ ሺ∆‫ܣ‬ሻଶ ൅ ሺ∆‫ܤ‬ሻଶ
Here a distribution of n (=1000) measurements of S = A + B will be generated, i.e. the
first value of S is the first measurement of A is added to the first of B and generally for
the ith term Si = Ai +Bi. In this way some errors/deviations from the true value will
reinforce positively or negatively and some will tend to cancel. This is as would be
expected in a real experiment.
•
•
•
Add the arrays A and B together to create the S array.
Plot a histogram and perform a statistical analysis of S to find its mean and standard
deviation.
Compare the mean of S with the expected value and its standard deviation with the
error in S calculated (in the usual way) using the standard deviations in A and B as
their errors.
Multiplication of A and B (product, P = AB)
Reminder: error propagation for P = AB
Partial differentiation gives
ൌ‫ܤ‬
а°Ўа®є
а°ЎаЇ‰
and
Or
߲ܲ ൌ ‫ܣ߲ܤ‬
and
Combining the ߲ܲ (or ∆P) contributions in quadrature
а°ЎаЇ‰
а°Ўа®»
ൌ‫ܣ‬
߲ܲ ൌ ‫ܤ߲ܣ‬
ሺ∆ܲሻଶ ൌ ሺ‫ܣ∆ܤ‬ሻଶ ൅ ሺ‫ܤ∆ܣ‬ሻଶ
Dividing by P = (AB) gives the familiar
2
2
∆௉ ଶ
∆஺ ଶ
∆஻ ଶ
б‰ЂаЇ‰б‰Ѓ аµЊб‰Ђа®єб‰Ѓ аµ…б‰Ђа®»б‰Ѓ
Here a distribution of n (=1000) measurements of P = AB will be generated, i.e. the first
value of P is the first measurement of A is multiplied with the first of B and generally for
the ith term Si = Ai.Bi. Again, some errors/deviations from the true value will reinforce
positively or negatively and some will tend to cancel.
• Use the same arrays for A and B as before.
• Multiply the A and B arrays together to produce P.
• Plot a histogram and perform a statistical analysis of P to find its mean and standard
deviation.
• Compare the mean of S with the expected value and its standard deviation with the
error in S calculated in the usual way.
2.1.3 Evolution of mean standard deviation and standard error
The aim here is to illustrate the difference between standard deviation and standard error
and their suitability in representing the random error in measurements.
The A array of 1000 points generated at the start of this section will again be used and
should not be overwritten. The approach will mimic an experiment in which the number
115
of measurements is gradually increased and the mean, standard deviation and standard
error evolve.
The Python programme written earlier needs to be modified to perform the analysis in this
section. To do this elegantly requires the use of “For loops” which is scheduled for week
7 (but subject to change). Depending on proficiency (and perhaps confidence) students
may use loops (a) or stick to a simpler sampling strategy (b).
For both strategies it will be necessary to sample (or return) parts of the array A, a
sequence that always starts with the first value. This skill was addressed in week 3 of the
computing course.
Start by testing that you can sample the array correctly.
(a) Simple sampling strategy
• Transfer the code to sample the array to your existing programme and test that it
performs correctly (eg by examining the mean of a small number of points).
• Next run the program to analyse the first 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 points.
• Plot a graph of (mean value – 2), +/- standard deviation and standard error on the y –
axis and number of samples (measurements) on the x-axis. (+/- are plotted here to
represent possible error ranges).
• Consider and describe the evolution with number of measurements.
(b) Advanced strategy (using For loops)
• By using a For loop it is possible to sample and analyse each measurement from 2 to
1000 points and see the evolution in much finer detail.
• However, do not attempt this approach unless you are proficient in the use of loops.
• Consider and describe the evolution with number of measurements.
2.2 Straight line graphs
Laboratory and computing courses have introduced the analytical method of finding the
“least squares” best fit (and associated errors) to straight line (linear) data. Although this
has been used it has not yet been examined in detail. To do this the “Hooke’s law data”,
given in Table 1, used in the computing module will be used as an example data set.
Mass (x_data)/kg
0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
Length (y_data)/m
0.055
0.074
0.089
0.124
0.135
0.181
0.193
Table 1: Hooke’s Law data taken from the computing course
Least squares analysis leads to gradient = 0.18+/-0.01 m/kg and y intercept = 0.055 +/0.006 m, so that the best estimate of the straight line representing the data is y = 0.18x
+0.005.
Reminder of the “least squares” approach.
116
•
•
•
•
The errors in x points are insignificant – this means that the deviation of a point from
the fit line can be taken to be solely associated with the y values. Consequently the
statistics describing this situation are essentially the same as those describing repeated
measurements of a single point.
The (random) errors characterising the y data points are all the same (and can be
described by a standard deviation) – this means that all points have equal importance
or “weight”.
The best fit line must pass through the mean of the x and y data values (x_mean and
y_mean respectively).
Since the errors in x points are insignificant the difference between the best fit line
and the data points is characterised by the difference between the corresponding y
values, known as “residuals”. The values of m and c when the square of the residuals
is minimised is the best fit line.
Note: the least squares method of obtaining best fits is not limited to straight line data
although it is then more difficult or impossible to find analytical expressions and it is
often necessary to resort to numerical techniques (through use of a computer).
The approach for investigating least squares fitting of straight line graphs
A set of straight lines all passing through the mean of the x and y data values but having
different gradients (including the best fit gradient) will be generated. The square of the
residuals will be calculated for each line and plotted against gradient.
Guided be the known best fit we’ll consider the quality of fits for gradients of m = 0.18
+/- 0.05 m/kg, i.e. in the range 0.13 to 0.23 m/kg in 0.01 m/kg steps.
Do the following
In the Spyder console:
• Generate arrays of x and y data points, call these x_data and y_data.
• Find the mean of the measured x and y points.
• For m = 0.18 m/kg (we’ll start with the best fit gradient) calculate an array of points
for the corresponding straight line based on the x_data points.
• Generate an array of the difference between the y data points and the y best line
points. These values are the residuals.
• Square the residuals and find their sum and record this in a table in your diary.
• Transfer the working code to the editor to create and save a little programme.
• Repeat* the calculation for all the required gradients.
• Plot a graph of sums of the squares of residuals versus gradient.
• Describe its form.
* This could also be done using a loop.
117
III: BACKGROUND NOTES
III.1: Experimental Notes:
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS EXPERIMENTS
In these experiments you will be required to build a variety of analogue electrical circuits
and to make measurements of potential differences, current flows etc. The following notes
give advice on building circuits and how to use test equipment, such as oscilloscopes,
multimeters and signal generators. The final section gives advice on eliminating faults in
electrical circuits.
1.
Building Circuits
1.1.Breadboards/Prototype boards (or “solderless breadboard” or “plugboard”)
Introduction
• Breadboards are used widely used for making temporary prototypes of electrical or
electronic circuits and for experimenting with circuit design.
• Individual components whether resistors, capacitors or integrated circuits can be
plugged directly onto the board and appropriately connected using “jump leads”.
• The facility to easily handle components, build simple (through to potentially very
complex) circuits and to re-use everything is why we use them in the teaching
laboratories.
Construction and use
Figure 1. Close up of a bread board as used in year one laboratory. The resistor and capacitor shown are connected in
series and jump leads link to binding posts to which coaxial or other leads can be connected.
Overview
• A breadboard consists of a perforated plastic block each perforation having a metalalloy spring clip behind it: the clips are known as tie points or contact points.
118
•
•
Sets of clips are electrically joined in rows or columns and the board essentially
consists of numerous unconnected sets that can be used (or not) as required.
The sets of contact points come in two separated types: “bus” and “terminal” (see
below) and an area of the same type is called a “strip”.
Terminal strip (where most of the devices are connected)
• This area has connected rows all 5 clips in length and a notch parallel to its long edge.
• The notch marks the centreline of the strip and is designed for integrated circuits to
straddle it and be allowed limited air flow for cooling.
Note: the spacing between clips and across the notch is specifically designed to accept
integrated circuits.
Bus strip (used to power devices)
• This area usually has two columns.
• The entire length of a column may be connected or there may be a break halfway
along.
• Breaks can be a useful feature but if not used it is often a good idea to link across the
gap at the start of the build.
• Bus strip typically run down the sides of terminal strips.
Larger boards (such as ours)
• May be mounted on a sheet of metal.
• Often consist of a number of strips clipped together.
• Typically include a number of binding posts that provide a clean way to connect an
external power supply.
Using breadboards (in the UG laboratories).
• The clips are designed to hold the legs (terminals) of electrical/electronic devices (e.g.
resistors or integrated circuits) or wires
• The legs of devices should not be shortened.
• The (jump) wires may be bought specially terminated or may be cut from a reel and
stripped of a suitable length of insulation: stripped wires should be 22AWG (0.33
mm2) and not multi-strand wires.
• When connecting jump wires to binding posts take care not to pinch down on
insulation: this is a common cause of poor connections. This is easily achieved by
ensuring that some bare jump wire visibly protrudes from the post.
• When connecting coaxial leads to the binding posts ensure that the earth goes to the
same post.
• Spring clips are rated for devices operating at 1 A/5 V or 0.33 A/15 V (i.e. 5 W
dissipated in the device).
Note: each clip takes one leg or wire only.
•
Care needs to be taken when testing circuits with a voltmeter or oscilloscope: it is
safest to insert a suitable terminated wire into a spring clip. When a (necessary sharp)
probe is used there is a danger that the spring clips may be damaged.
119
Limitations of breadboards
• The relatively high and not very reproducible contact resistances (the resistance
between the spring clips and the wire pushed into them) can be a problem for d.c. of
low frequency circuits.
• The current and voltage ratings provide limitations.
• Stray capacitance and inductance combined with contact resistances limit high
frequency operation to ~10 MHz.
2.
The Oscilloscope
An oscilloscope is a common and important test equipment that allows voltages varying
in time to be visualised a on a 2D plot. Usually one (or two) signal voltages, on the
vertical axis, are plotted as a function of time, on the horizontal axis.
The basic functions of the oscilloscope are shown in Figure 2. Most of the
functions are self explanatory.
Function Keys: Accesses the function alongside the button shown on the LCD display
Variable Knob: Increases or decreases a value and moves to the next or previous
parameter
CH1/CH2/Math: Configures the vertical scale and coupling for each channel input (CH1
and CH2), and also Math operations such as �add’, �subtract’, or perform �Fast Fourier
Transforms (FFT)’ on input waveforms
Volts/Div: Sets the y axis scale
Time/Div Knob: Sets the timebase (x-axis scale)
Autoset Key: Automatically configures the horizontal, vertical, and trigger settings
according to the input signal.
Trigger Level Knob: Sets the trigger level. This controls the scope's ability to reproduce
a steady trace on the screen.
GW Instek GDS-1022 oscilloscope
Introduction
The GW Instek is a digital oscilloscope with the advantage, over older analogue scopes,
that the instrument can perform mathematical manipulations, i.e. it will do some data
analysis for you.
Figure 2. Front panel of the GW Instek oscilloscope. Particularly important features initially are
shown with circles
120
This is meant to be a reference guide. For a step by step guide see the first year
experiment “Intro to oscilloscopes and multi-meters”.
2 Finding your way around the LCD display
Traces (waveforms) are visible on a grid that is spilt into small (10x8) squares.
Information is colour coded: yellow and blue correspond to channels 1 and 2 respectively.
There is a lot of information around the periphery of the display that changes depending
on use
To the left of the trace:
• A number (the channel number) and an arrow (►) showing the 0 V position.
• The position of 0 V (and so the whole trace) can be altered up/down by rotating the
“vertical” channel 1. When this is done the position of 0V on the screen (versus the
central horizontal axis) is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the display.
To the right:
• The broad blue column contains a changeable “menu” of choices and measurements.
• On the trace is an arrow (◄) indicating the “triggering voltage”.
Underneath the trace:
• On the LHS the scales for the two channels are given. These numbers give the
voltage corresponding to the vertical side of a (~1 cm) square (i.e. volts per division).
• Note that the active channel is denoted by a number on a coloured background
whereas the inactive channel is a number on a dark background
• Next along is the “horizontal status”: “M” is for Main mode (of the scope) and the
time corresponds to a ~1cm square (or time per division).
• On the right, both with a green background, are a “T” (for Trigger) followed by the
triggering conditions: in this case an edge (i.e. a changing signal) on the channel 1
waveform, in fact here a rising edge (i.e. the signal must be increasing with time).
Below this is an “f” (for frequency) followed by a value.
Above the trace:
• The “▼” symbol above the centre of the screen and the symbols above it relate to the
horizontal position of the waveform. Altered by rotating the “horizontal” knob.
• To the right in green “Trig’d ●” indicates that a signal is being triggered (on taking the
trigger voltage out of the range of the signal this changes to “auto ●/o” meaning that
the screen is updated regardless of the trigger conditions). Alter with “Trigger_level”
knob.
3 About triggering
• Triggering is central to the operation of oscilloscopes but has many variants and so
will be only introduced here. See section 7 for more information.
• In operation the oscilloscope displays one trace and then almost immediately replaces
it with another. The reason that the display appears stable on the screen is that each
trace is made to start in the same place, i.e. it is “triggered” under the same conditions.
In fact, with this digital scope the trigger point is in the centre of the x axis on the
screen.
• If the trigger level (voltage) goes out of the range of the oscillating signal the system
cannot trigger and the screen simply updates randomly leading to an unstable trace.
4 Setting up single or two channel y-t traces (using “Default Setup” and “Autoset”)
A default setup is a useful configuration to start from or return to. To get to it:
121
•
•
•
Turn on the oscilloscope and when the GW Instek banner has disappeared press
“Save/Recall” and then select “Default Setup” (Channel 1 and 2 are then positioned at
the centre of the top and bottom halves of the screen respectively).
If only channel 1 is required cancel channel 2 by pressing its button twice (once to
select, 2nd time to turn it off). (Note: channel 1 (2) button is yellow (blue) and this
colour code is also used on the LCD display.)
Pressing “Autoset”: with a reasonable signal level (>30 mV) and frequency (>20 Hz)
the scope will choose suitable signal (y axis) and time (x axis) ranges and triggering
conditions.
5 Making simple measurements with the oscilloscope
Oscilloscopes aren’t precise measurement instruments (but good enough in years 1, 2).
Using “Cursor” (to do some of the work)
• Press “Cursor” and two vertical lines appear in the screen that are used to give 2
horizontal positions (X1 and X2).
• Alternatively, pressing the X↔Y function key accesses 2 vertical positions (Y1 and
Y2).
• The position of the cursors is controlled by the “Variable” knob (at top left).
• With the function key X1X2 (Y1Y2) selected the separation of the cursors is fixed.
• To control them individually select X1 (Y1) or X2 (Y2).
Note: if the cursors positioned time t apart the scope calculates a frequency (f = 1/t), but
this only makes sense (as a rough measure) if t corresponds to one period, T.
Using “Measure” (to do all of the work)
• Press the “Measure” menu key and the peak to peak voltages (Vpp), the average
voltage (Vavg)), the frequency (f) directly in the blue column (and stuff that will be
ignored here).
6 Setting up an X-Y display
Instead of plotting against time on the x-axis, here the channel 1 input controls the X-axis,
whilst channel 2 controls the Y-axis. To set this up:
• With both channels active press the Horizontal “Menu” key”.
• Press XY.
122
7. Additional Notes on Timebase trigger
For the analysis of time varying voltages the trace on the oscilloscope screen must be
stationary. If the timebase were "free-running", that is, not synchronised to some multiple
of the repeat-time or period of the input waveform then the trace on the screen would not
be stable.
To synchronise the timebase to the repeat time or period of the input waveform a "trigger"
is used. The trigger circuit in the oscilloscope effectively 'fires' or emits a pulse when the
input voltage passes a set threshold level. This pulse is then used to initiate the timebase
cycle. The input to the trigger circuitry is normally taken from the y axis input amplifier.
Sometimes it is found necessary to apply an alternative, externally-derived voltage direct
to the trigger circuit via the external trigger input.
The trigger is sensitive to both slope and polarity of the input waveform and can be set to
fire on a particular slope and on positive or negative polarity. Hence, if a periodic
waveform such as a sinusoid is applied to the input terminals, the trigger can be set to fire
once every cycle at a fixed point in the cycle (Figure 3). The timebase cycle shown would
lead to a stationary trace representing one cycle of the input waveform.
The trigger level is shown on the display on the RHS of the axis (small arrow marker).
This is the trigger threshold voltage shown in figure 3.
Figure 3: Understanding the timebase
123
Notes on the AC and DC components of the oscilloscope waveform.
Figure 4(b)
Figure 4(a)
Figure 4(c)
A general time-varying voltage such as that shown in Figure 4(a) may be divided into two
components:
(i)
a D.C. component, equal in magnitude to the mean value (ie, the average over all
time) of the waveform (Figure 4(b)) and
(ii)
an A.C. component which remains when the D.C. component has been removed
from the waveform (Figure 4(c)).
The oscilloscope amplifiers may be D.C. or A.C. coupled. Try this on the waveform you
are observing. When the coupling is set to D.C. the trace represents both the D.C. and
A.C. components as shown in Figure 4(a). Setting the coupling to A.C. removes the D.C.
component just leaving the A.C. component as in Figure 4(c).
124
3.
The Multimeter
The multimeter you will encounter in your first year experiments (and many subsequest)
is a hand held digital device shown in figure 5. It is capable of measuring direct and
alternating voltages and currents, resistance, and diode readout. You must select the
mode of operation on a central switch, apply your terminals correctly and select the
appropriate measuring range.
Display
Range Button
Rotary Switch
Terminals
Figure 5: The Multimeter
4.
The Signal Generator
The output from the oscillator is available from the bottom right BNC socket. The signal
amplitude can be varied by means of the attenuator (O dB or -20 dB) and the variable
output level. Three different waveforms are available: sine, triangular and square. The
OFFSET knob works only when the DC OFFSET button is depressed.
5.
Resistance Colour Codes
Resistors are colour-coded to indicate their resistance, tolerance and power-handling
capacity. The background colour indicates the maximum power of the device. You will
use only 0.5 W resistors (dark red background). The four coloured bands can be read as
described below to determine the resistance and tolerance.
The final gold or silver band gives the tolerance as follows:
gold В± 5%
silver В± 10%
125
Digit
Colour
Multiplier
No. of zeros
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
silver
gold
black
brown
red
orange
yellow
green
blue
violet
grey
white
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1k
10 k
100 k
1M
10 M
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table 1.1: Resistor colour-codes
Example: red-yellow-orange-gold is a 24 kΩ, 5% resistor.
6.
Finding Faults in Electronic Circuits
During the course of the laboratory work you will probably encounter practical
difficulties. You should always try to solve these problems yourself, but if you are unable
then you should call on the assistance of the demonstrator.
Occasionally, a circuit will fail to operate because of a faulty component, but more often
than not problems arise from the incorrect use of test equipment, the omission of power
supplies from circuits, or the use of broken test leads. Faults are not usually apparent to
the naked eye, but they may be detected quite easily by following a systematic checking
procedure such as that outlined below. If after following these procedures your circuit
still doesn't work, then DO NOT HESITATE TO ASK THE DEMONSTRATOR FOR
HELP.
(i)
Ensure that you understand how to use each piece of test equipment. If in doubt,
consult the demonstrator.
(ii)
Examine the circuit for any obvious faults. Is the circuit identical to the circuit
diagram in the script? Are the components the correct values? Are there any loose
wires or connectors which could short out part of the circuit?
(iii) The fault may lie in the circuit itself, in the signal generator which supplies the input
signal, or in the measuring equipment. Switch on the power supply to the circuit and
apply the input signal. Use both channels of a double-beam scope to measure
simultaneously the input and output signals of the circuit. Check at this stage to see
whether the scope leads are faulty. Ensuring that you do not earth any signals (see
next section), connect the scope to the input and output of the test circuit. If there is
no input signal, disconnect the signal generator and test it on its own. If the
126
generator functions only when disconnected from the circuit, it implies that the fault
lies in the circuit and that it is possibly some type of short circuit, most likely
associated with incorrect earthing. If there is an input signal but no output signal,
the fault lies in the circuit.
(iv) A common fault which occurs when using more than one piece of mains-powered
equipment is the incorrect connection of earth lines. ALL EARTHS MUST BE
CONNECTED TO A COMMON POINT, otherwise the signal may be shorted out.
(v)
If you have established that the fault lies in the circuitry, use your scope to examine
the passage of the signal through the circuit. Components which you regard as
faulty should be isolated or removed from the circuit for further testing.
(vi) If you trace a fault to a piece of mains-powered equipment, DO NOT ATTEMPT
TO REPAIR THE FAULT YOURSELF. Report the fault to the demonstrator or
technician and ask for replacement equipment.
HOW TO USE A VERNIER SCALE
Vernier scales are used on many measuring instruments including the travelling
microscope that we will use in the laboratory. We will begin by looking at the general
principle of a vernier scale and then look at the particular scale we will use.
Figure 5 shows a vernier scale reading zero. Note that the 10 divisions of the vernier have
the same length as 9 divisions of the main scale. If the smallest division on the main scale
is 1mm then the smallest scale on the vernier must be 0.9mm. This vernier would then
have a precision of 0.1mm and results should be quoted to В±0.1mm.
10
0
Main scale
Vernier
0
Figure 5: Vernier Scale
Let us see how it works. Examine figure 6. The position of the zero on the vernier scale
gives us the reading. Here it is just beyond 2mm so the first part of the reading is 2mm.
The second part (to the nearest 0.1mm) is read off at the first point at which the lines on
the main scale and the vernier coincide. Here it is the 4th mark on the vernier (don’t count
the zero mark). The reading is therefore 2.4 mm.
127
10
0
0
Figure 6: using the vernier
To see why examine figure 7, which is an alternative version of figure 6.
x
D1
D2
0
1
0
Figure 7: why a vernier works
In essence we have been finding the distance X, which is simply given by:
X = D1 – D2 = 4×1mm - 4×0.9mm = 4 ×0.1mm = 0.4mm
So that is the general principle. Let us see how the travelling microscope scale works.
In this case the smallest division on the main scale is 1mm, which implies that the
smallest division on the vernier is 49/50 mm = 0.02 mm
As an example the reading in figure 1.8 is 113.68mm.
128
Best Match
Figure 8: example reading = 113.68mm.
Note: unlike the examples in figures 5-7 the vernier is above the main scale.
129
III.2 ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTAL DATA: ERRORS IN
MEASUREMENT
Contents
1. Introduction
1.1 Important concepts of measurements and their associated “errors”
1.2. The importance of estimating errors (with examples)
2. The nature of errors (a discussion in terms of single measurements)
2.1. Classes of errors
2.2 Illegitimate errors
2.2.1 Mistakes in calculations
2.2.2 Mistakes in measurement
2.3 Systematic errors
2.4 Random errors
2.5 The interplay between systematic and random errors
2.6 A note on experimental skill and personal judgement
3. Presentation of measured values
3.1 Accuracy and precision
3.2 Significant figures
3.2.1 How many significant figures should be used for a value?
3.3 The acceptable ways of presenting measured values
3.3.1 Required format for undergraduates
3.3.2 Alternative forms that may be met
4. Calculating with measured parameters and combining errors
4.1 Error propagation: the general case
4.2 Commonly occurring special cases
4.3 Notes on performing error calculations
5. Multiple measurements (of a single parameter)
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Importance of repeat or multiple measurements (of a single value)
5.3 Introduction to statistics (distributions, populations and samples)
5.3.1 Distributions
5.3.2 Line-shapes
5.3.3 Terminology: “Populations”, “samples” and real experiments
5.3.4 Experimental information found from a distribution
5.3.5 Extraction of information as a function of sample size
5.4 The statistics of distributions
5.4.1 Mean
5.4.1 Variance (mean square deviation) and standard deviation
5.4.2 Standard error
5.5 Summary - what to use as the random error as a function of n
6. Multiple measurements: straight line graphs
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Presenting experimental data on graphs
6.3 Finding the Slope and Intercept (and their errors)
6.3.1 The two approaches
6.3.2 Finding gradient, intercept and their errors by hand
130
6.3.3 Finding gradient, intercept and their errors by computation
6.4 Error bars (and outliers)
6.4.1 When to use error bars
6.4.2 Outliers
6.4.3 Dealing with a small numbers of data points
6.5 Forcing lines to be straight
7. Some experimental considerations
7.1 Terminology
7.2 Comparing results with accepted values
7.3 y = mx relationships
8. Some important distributions
8.1 Binomial statistics
8.2. The normal (or Gaussian ) distribution
8.3 Poisson distribution
8.4 Lorentzian distribution
Additional reading
These notes are intended to be just a brief guide to errors in measurement. For further
details the following books are recommended:
G.L. Squires "Practical Physics" 3rd ed Cambridge University Press (1985)
N.C.Barford "Experimental Measurements: Precision, Error and Truth" 2nd ed J.Wiley
(1985)
P.R. Bevington "Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences" McGrawHill (1969)
“Squires” is a very good, very accessible book that is available in the library. It has a
strong emphasis on the relationship to experiment, was referred to extensively when rewriting these notes and is highly recommended.
1. Introduction
This document is intended as a reference guide for undergraduates in all years of physics
degrees in Cardiff University. Most of the concepts covered in this document are covered
in 1st year courses and may be considered an essential basis for any experimentalist.
There are many more sophisticated and specialist approaches that may be met during an
undergraduate degree course that are beyond the scope of this document.
As the title of this indicates this document is concerned with a particular aspect of the
analysis of experimental data. A good start is therefore to consider what is meant by
analysis:
“Analysis” generally is the detailed examination of “something” (in this case data). It is
performed by a process of breaking up “something” that is initially complex into smaller
parts to gain a better understanding of it.
(Data) analysis is therefore a type of problem that needs to be solved. With any type of
problem often the most difficult part is finding a way to start addressing it. One place to
start is by considering “errors”. But before that, some terminology.
131
1.1 Important concepts of measurements and their associated “errors”
The “true value” (of the physical quantity being measured) is as its name suggests.
Determining the best estimate of the “true value” of something is usually an important
aim of physics experiments.
The above statement causes a problem. It is not usually* possible to be certain of “true
values”, experiments can only ever provide “measured values” and discrepancies are
expected.
The word “Error” in scientific terminology is usually quoted as meaning "deviation from
true value" or "uncertainty in true value" it is not the same as "mistake"
Consequently it is the “measured values” or the “best estimate of the true value” that
must be expressed along with their associated errors. Undergraduates in this School are
asked to do this using the form**:
(measured value +/- error) units
[1]
The measured value and its error clearly define an interval (from value - error to value +
error). The situation isn’t entirely straightforward so for now all that will be claimed is
that the experiment suggests that the “true value” lies within this interval.
This document is mainly concerned with methods of deciding upon reasonable/realistic
estimates for the error. It will reveal the underlying importance of statistics and explain a
method of combining errors whilst avoiding becoming a course in mathematics.
Although there will be some discussion of how errors arise in different experimental
circumstances and their importance in extracting meaning from experiments these are not
of primary concern. However, whilst ignoring specifics, it should be recognised that to
improve understanding (our ultimate aim) it is often necessary to obtain “better”
measurements with smaller errors achieved through use of better instruments and/or
experimental technique.
* It would be wrong to say that there aren’t cases where exact true values can be found,
for example:
• How many electrons are allowed to exist in a particular atomic orbital?
• How many legs does a bird have?
** There is more on this and some alternative forms in usage later.
1.2. The importance of estimating errors
In order to get any meaning from measurements it is essential that the value obtained is
quoted with a reasonable estimate of its error. Put the other way around, measurements
without errors are meaningless.
Since the determination of errors is a time consuming process and the bane of students’
experimental lives this requires some justification.
Example: Suppose a student measures the resistance of a coil of wire and writes down:
"The resistance of the coil of wire was 200·025 Ω at 10oC and 200·034 Ω at 20 oC, so the
resistance increases with temperature".
Without more information, the student's statement is not justified. We must know the
errors in the measurements to say if the difference between the two figures is significant
or not. If the error is ± 0·001 Ω, i.e. each value might be up to 0·001 Ω higher or lower
than the stated value, then the difference between the two resistances is significant. But if
the error is ± 0·01 Ω the two values agree within errors and the difference is not
significant.
132
Example: Two students perform an identical experiment to determine the acceleration
due to gravity, g (on the Earth’s surface this has a value of 9.80+/-0.02 m/s2 - note that the
error in g here arises from the variation in its value over the Earth’s surface).
The first student returns g = 11+/-2 m/s2 and the second student g = (10.2 +/- 0.3) m/s2.
What can be said about these results?
• Without considering errors, all that can be said is that the results from the second
student “appear” better than from the first.
• With errors only the first students result agrees with the known value.
• But then again, the smaller error quoted by the second students implies that this data
set is “better” in some sense (possibly resulting from more careful or skilful
experimentation) and hints that there may be an underlying problem with the
equipment or with the way the experiment was carried out.
Clearly there are problems with both data sets and it is not possible to get to the bottom of
this just by looking at the numbers. However, errors are necessary in order to start to get
an understanding of what is happening.
The next step in this case would be to go back to the original data to see if there were
problems with the analysis carried out. If the analysis was reasonable in both cases it may
well be that the second student has unearthed an issue with the experiment.
It would be highly unlikely in this case that some new physics has been unearthed but
with a different experiment this is one way that science works.
2. The nature of errors (a discussion in terms of single measurements)
Initially restricting discussion to single measurements of a physical parameter allows a
sensible progression through the subject. However, almost all of what is included here
applies equally to the more complicated cases with multiple measurements.
2.1 Classes of Error
The term "error" represents a finite uncertainty in a measurement due to intrinsic
experimental limitations. These limitations can arise from a number of causes, here they
will be considered as being of two distinct classes. These are:
• Systematic errors - these are the result of a defect either in the apparatus or
experimental procedure leading to a (usually) constant error throughout a set of
readings.
This type of error can be difficult to track down. One test is to perform measurements
of well known value, if there is discrepancy there may well be a significant systematic
error present.
• Random errors - these are the result of a lack of consistency in either the apparatus
or experimental procedure leading to a distribution of results (if/when they are
repeated) that is equally positive and negative.
This is the type of error usually responsible for the spread of results when
measurements are repeated.
Good results are only obtained by eliminating illegitimate errors and minimising both
systematic and random errors.
In addition to the above, another type of error needs to be mentioned. It is different
because its errors are not intrinsic to the experiment and so is often ignored when errors
are discussed..
• Illegitimate errors (or mistakes) - these are the result of mistakes in computation or
measurement. This class of error is worthy of consideration because mistakes happen
133
and have to be dealt with ethically and with scientific integrity. Such errors are
usually (but not always) easily identified as obviously incorrect data points or values
far from expected.
The rest of section 2 discussed these classes of errors in turn and in more detail.
2.2 Illegitimate errors (mistakes)
Reminder: this class is usually ignored since definitions of scientific errors excludes it.
One way of viewing this is that science works on the implicit assumption that every effort
has been made to eradicate all mistakes from experimental results before they are
presented. Scientists being human, mistakes will get through (some are really difficult to
identify) but published work is open to being checked by others.
At this point it is a good idea to distinguish between mistakes in calculations and
measurement.
2.2.1 Mistakes in calculations
These are simple to deal with (when identified) as there is no judgement involved, either a
mistake has been made or it hasn’t. Students are generally poor at going back to their
original data and checking calculations even when faced with values that are out by orders
of magnitude. You will make mistakes with calculations and you will need to go back
over your numbers to figure out where. Hint, if you are out by factors of ~10, 100, 1000
etc the place to start is any conversion between units (e.g. millimetres to metres).
Example: Subtle calculation errors can arise through the number of significant figures
used in performing a calculation. In some contexts you might be fully aware - in “back of
the envelope” calculations rounding approximations such as g = 10 m/s2 or e = 10-19 C
might be made in order to facilitate quick combination of values and this is fine when
order of magnitude results are adequate. However, when accurate values are required,
premature rounding can introduce illegitimate errors.
2.2.2 Mistakes in measurement
These are far more contentious as there is a danger of consciously or sub-consciously
manipulating results possibly to fit certain pre-conceived expectations. This is scientific
fraud. But, it is also true that mistakes can be made - with a subsequent need to ignore
otherwise misleading results.
So how is this handled with scientific integrity? The general principal is to not let
yourself get into the situation where you might be tempted to fiddle results.
Example. After data collection it may become apparent that an individual data point lies
far removed from all the others.
Partly based on how far out this point lies a decision may then be made to ignore this data
point in further analysis. However, in the analysis it should be made clear that such a
decision has been made and why (if it isn’t clear), the point should be labelled as an
“outlier”. This process allows re-analysis with inclusion of the outlier - such a process
may be performed in any case in order to see its effect.
Example. During a measurement it may be suspected that a mistake has been made, for
example in counting the number of swings of a pendulum, in starting/stopping a timer or
in the settings applied to an instrument. If it is known, or suspected at the time of
performing the measurement, that an error was made then the data point or set of points
can be safely discarded. However, if the measurement only becomes suspect as a result of
the values obtained then it is not valid to discard them out of hand, they then fall into the
category of “outliers”.
134
In both of the above examples the issue is best resolved by performing repeat
measurements (not often possible in years 0 and 1 but required from year 2 onwards).
There will very little further consideration of illegitimate errors in this document.
2.3 Systematic errors
Systematic errors can arise in an experiment in a number of ways. For example :
•
Zero error: from use of a ruler that is worn at the end, or a voltmeter may read a
non-zero value even when no voltage is applied across its terminals.
•
Calibration error: an incorrectly marked ruler can produce a systematic error
which may vary along its length. Wooden rulers are good to about 1/2mm in 1 metre.
Even expensive steel standards must be used at correct temperature to avoid a systematic
error.
•
Parallax error: this may occur when reading the position of an object or a pointer
against a scale (e.g. a ruler) from which it is separated. The reading can depend on the
viewing angle.
Timing errors are a common example of systematic errors. Apart from errors introduced
by a clock running too slowly there is also the tendency of a human operator (or indeed
electronics) to start a clock consistently too soon or too late (which may show up as a zero
error).
To achieve good results systematic errors must be carefully considered and reduced so
that they become insignificant (in most cases it is impossible to remove them entirely).
Two tricks that can be useful here: (i) compare the results to another experiment made
using different apparatus and using a different method; (ii) where possible use the
equipment to make measurements of known values. In both cases, if there is good
agreement there is greater confidence that the systematic error is insignificant and results
can be trusted.
2.4. Random errors
These as mentioned arise from fluctuations in observations so that results differ from
experiment to experiment. It is easy to see that these will arise when experiments are
performed by hand as human factors will mean that way that it is performed is not exactly
the same. But in a similar fashion measuring instruments are also prone to variation, for
example: both mechanical and electrical instruments will vary with the ambient
temperature (and other factors), both analogue and digital instruments suffer from
rounding errors, low signal measurements are prone to the effects of noise etc.
The reduction of random errors can be achieved in three ways: improvement of the
experiment, refinement of technique and repeating the experiment.
2.5 The interplay between systematic and random errors
Illustrated in figure 1 are the results of a number of measurements of a quantity x (which
could be a length, voltage, temperature etc.).
In this figure the position of the true value is marked and each small vertical line marks
the result of experimental determinations of x. In figure 1a the results are scattered about
the true value with no bias for low or high values, so you would expect the average of all
the results to be close to the true value. This is the case where random errors dominate any systematic errors are negligible. In figure 1b, there is, in addition to random errors, a
systematic error which means that average value is shifted to a value smaller than the true
value.
135
x
(a)
true value
x
(b)
Figure 1 (a) Random errors only, any systematic error is insignificant. (b) Significant
random and systematic errors present.
From the above it is clear that:
• Measured values close to the true value are obtained if the systematic error is small
• A small systematic error will only be revealed when the random error is small.
Less obviously:
• It is possible to have a small random error even with a large spread of data points this is addressed later in the section on multiple measurements.
• Systematic and random errors are always present. However, systematic errors are
ignored when they are small compared to random errors.
2.6 A note on experimental skill and personal judgement
Experimental skill and personal judgement are both important. Students should find this
statement both worrying and reassuring at the same time. Worrying because simply
following a set of instructions often produces bad results, reassuring because there are
rewards for practical ability and training. Bad results can be understood to be the
consequence of having significantly larger random and systematic errors. So how can this
come about?
Example: The error in a length measured with a rule will be influenced by the fineness of
the graduations on the scale, but the position of the scale relative to the object and how the
system is viewed are important (for both random and systematic errors) as is the ability to
interpolate between graduations (mainly for random errors).
Generally, experimenters should understand the equipment in use, acquire a feel for it
and, based on this, subsequently use their judgement. This applies equally to experiments
in which the data acquisition is handled by a computer. There is a tendency for students
to have a greater trust in results obtained via a computer. This is dangerous and it is better
to treat all equipment with the same initial (healthy) mistrust.
3. Presentation of measured values
Knowing about classes of errors it is now possible to discuss the presentation of measured
values in greater detail, starting with more of the terminology that accompanies it.
3.1 Accuracy and precision
As with “errors” the terms "accuracy" and "precision" have distinct meanings in
experimental science. In fact, accuracy is closely linked to both systematic and random
errors whilst precision relates only to the random error.
• Accuracy - The accuracy of an experiment is determined by how close the
measurement is to the true value, in other words how correct the measurement is.
From the above sections it should be clear that a value can only be accurate if the
136
•
systematic error is small, however, even with a small systematic error a measurement
will lose accuracy if the random error increases.
Precision - The precision of an experiment is determined by the size of the spread of
values obtained in repeated measurements regardless of its accuracy. As illustrated in
figure 2 a smaller spread of values corresponds to a more precise measurement. From
the above sections, a value can only be highly precise if the random error is small.
Precision and random error are essentially equivalent - the random error is often
termed the precision of a measurement.
Figure 2 Two groups of measurements of x with different precisions (for a small
systematic error the values are distributed about the true value).
Some examples may serve to illustrate these definitions:
Example: Supposing a steel rod is measured to be 1.2031+/- 0.0001 m in length, i.e. its
length has been expressed to the nearest 0.1mm. This measurement implies a precision of
0.1 mm. But suppose that, due to wear at the end of the ruler used to measure the rod, this
figure is in error by 1mm. Then, despite the quoted precision, the measurement is
inaccurate.
Note: The precision quoted here is more formally known as the “absolute precision”.
This is distinct from the “relative precision” which is given in terms of the fraction (or
percentage) of the value of the result. In this case the relative precision is 0.0001/1.2031
= 8x10-5 (or 0.008%).
Example: Suppose that the true value of a temperature of an object is 20В·3440 oC: a
measurement of 20В·3 +/-0.1oC is accurate (it agrees with the true value within errors); a
measurement of 20В·33+/-0.02 oC is both accurate and more precise (and could be claimed
to be “more accurate”); a measurement of 20·322 +/- 0.005oC is more precise but now
must be stated to be inaccurate because it does not agree with the true value within error.
The terms “accuracy” and “precision” as defined allow results and experiments to be
considered more meaningfully. The second example illustrates that as the random error in
reduced and precision improves systematic errors, previously hidden, start to emerge.
When systematic errors are evident there is little usually little point in improving the
precision further - steps should first be taken to reduce systematic errors.
137
In the rest of this guidance it will be implicitly assumed that systematic errors are
negligible compared to random errors. This will allow the discussion to be presented
such that when a more precise measurement is made, the accuracy will also be greater.
Bear in mind that in real experiments this will not always be true.
3.2 Significant figures
In the previous section it was seen that as the precision of the experiment improved the
number of significant figures (s.f.s), used to quote the result, increased. By contrast, by
their nature errors are estimates (i.e. imprecisely known) and so can only be quoted to 1
or 2 s.f.s. This can be a little confusing at first and, perhaps not surprisingly, a common
mistake that students make is to use an incorrect number of significant figures. This
section uses two examples in an attempt to clarify the situation - ultimately it is simply
common sense.
3.2.1 The use of significant figures
Example: A measurement of distance can be correctly quoted as (4.85 +/- 0.02) mm or
(0.485 +/- 0.002) cm or (0.00485 +/- 0.00002) m. These values are equivalent, all we’ve
done is change the units:
• The significant figures (s.f.s) are 4,8 and 5 hence in his case all measured values are
quoted to 3 s.f.s.
• The largest figure (4 in the above example) is the most significant figure and the
smallest number (5 here) is the least significant figure.
• The position of the decimal point therefore has no bearing on the number of s.f.’s.
• The error here is quoted to one s.f..
• The number of significant figures used for the measured value is determined by the
least s.f. in the error. This is also the (fixed in this example) precision of the
measurement.
Example: To illustrate this further take the temperatures given in an example in section 1
- (20В·3 +/-0.1)oC, (20В·33+/-0.02)oC, (20В·322 +/- 0.005)oC. These measured values are
quoted to 3,4 and 5 significant figures (s.f.) respectively, this contrasts with their errors
(here) always quoted to 1 s.f. (remember that a maximum of 2 s.f.s are allowed for errors).
In all cases, the size/decimal place of the least significant figure in the error determines
the least significant figure in the value and therefore the precision of the measurement.
The 3 values quoted are therefore of different precisions.
Finally, it would be wrong to quote these values in the following ways:
(20В·33 +/-0.1)oC (value more precise than error)
(20В·322 +/- 0.0005)oC (error more precise than value)
(20В·322 +/- 0.125)oC (to many s.f.s in the error)
3.3 Acceptable ways of presenting measured values
3.3.1 Required format for undergraduates
Reminder: the format required by the School has already been given as (measured value
+/- error) units. The subtleties of the required format will be addressed using an example,
the value of a distance S:
S = (2.36 +/- 0.04) km
•
•
[2]
The value and error are enclosed in brackets because the units apply to both.
The form above allows easy use and appreciation of both numbers and units.
138
•
•
•
•
•
•
The alternative form (23650 +/- 40) m is equally as good.
The alternative form (2365000 +/- 4000) cm is less easily appreciated.
Using powers of 10 instead of prefixes (such as k for kilo) is certainly allowed.
If a power of 10 is quoted, rather than incorporated in the units it must go outside the
brackets, e.g. R = (2.36 +/- 0.04) x103 m.
If a power of 10 is quoted then the exponent will be a positive or negative integer, n.
(Some publications may insist that the exponent should be an integer multiplied by 3,
i.e. use 103n, but this is not something that we insisted upon for undergraduates lab
diaries or reports).
The value of the quantity and its error should be quoted to the same power of 10 and
in the same units so that they can be compared easily (e.g. 2.36 km +/- 40 m) would
not be acceptable).
3.3.2 Alternative forms that may be met
The required format above is an unambiguous style of presentation but other formats are
used in which the error is not given explicitly. Students should be aware of the different
ways of presenting data as they should always be clear of the errors associated with any
experimental values that they meet.
Alternatives to the required format: The simplest way of indicating the precision of a
measurement is through the number of significant figures quoted (as is done in the
required format). Here though no error is given and an error (or precision) of 1 in the
final figure is inferred. For example, if presented with a length given as 1.23 m, the
inference is that in the required format it would be given as (1.23 +/- 0.01) m.
Clearly there is potential for ambiguity here. For example, if there was a requirement to
present all length in mm’s then with the above example there is a temptation to quoted the
value as 1230 mm which is clearly wrong as the zero is not significant. The value could
instead be quoted as 1.23 x 103 mm.
Although not recommended here scientists often quote one more figure than is justified by
the error. In the required format this might appear as (1.232 +/- 0.01) m and it is clear that
the last figure is not significant. Where the error is not quoted then it is necessary to
distinguish between figures that are significant and those that are not and this can be done
with by placing insignificant figures in bracket or as a subscript, i.e. 1.23(2) m or 1.233 m.
The reason for quoting an extra figure is to avoid introducing (a form of illegitimate) error
if the value is used in subsequent calculations (see section 4 below “Calculating with
measured values..”).
Fundamental constants and material parameters: Almost certainly the most common
measured parameters that students are exposed to are the fundamental constants quoted in
textbooks, lab books, data books etc. Following that may be material properties such as
the speed of sound in air or the density of water. It can be forgotten that these parameters
are (almost always) measured parameters and so are known to limited precision. So what
to make of the values presented?
It is a fact of life that the presentation of these “known”* or “accepted”* values does lack
consistency, although in many cases it is clear what has been done. For example in the
School’s “Mathematical Formulae and Physical Constants” handbook fundamental
constants are quoted to (mostly) 3 s.f.s. Since the constants are known to much greater
precision than this, here it is obvious that the values have been rounded - and because of
this the final figure has a precision (error) of 1. In addition, constants handbooks
generally indicate the associated errors and often reference the source of the information.
139
The situation is less clear for example when values are rounded but not obviously so, and
it should be remembered that values quoted in old publications may be out of date.
* Undergraduate experiments often measure parameters that have well “known” or
“accepted” values. The precision with which they are established lends itself to thinking
that these are “true” values and they may reasonably be used this way in teaching
laboratories. However, bear in mind that at the limits of their precision there may well be
disagreements between the different laboratories or experiments used to determine them.
4. Calculating with measured parameters and finding overall errors (error
propagation)
Sometimes in science finding the parameter that we measure directly is the main point of
the experiment, sometimes it is necessary to incorporate it into a function, combine it with
known constants or combine a number of measured parameters and constants. For
example, the value of a resistor R can be found by measuring the current I through it and
the voltage V across it and using R = V/I.
The process of using functions or combining values is usually straightforward. However,
it is not obvious how the corresponding errors are determined, a process commonly
known as “error propagation”. (Reminder - only random errors are being considered
here.)
This section starts by considering the general case before presenting the outcomes for
commonly occurring special cases.
4.1 Error propagation: the general case
The problem here is to find the overall change of a function due to (small) changes in its
component parts. The answer can be found using calculus, if a value z is a function of x
and y, (i.e. z = f(x,y)) partial differentiation can be used to find the effect of a small change
in either x or y. (Partial differentiation is taught in the first year and the process is
essentially one of differentiating with respect to (w.r.t.) one variable whilst holding all the
others constant).
The partial differential of z with respect to x (holding y constant) is given by ∂z ∂x so that
the change in z (i.e. ∆z )due to a small change in x (i.e. ∆x) is:
∂z
∆z = ∆x
[3]
∂x
There is a similar expression for changes in z due to changes in y and the total change in z,
i.e. the “total differential” is then given by
∆z =
∂z
∂z
∆x + ∆y
∂x
∂y
[4]
The above equation concerns two variables but clearly the number of terms on the right
hand side would increase to match the number of variables in an arbitrary function. Even
so, ∆z in the above equation cannot be used as the combined error arising from the errors,
∆x and ∆y, in x and y respectively. The reason is that in the above equation the signs of
both the derivatives and the errors are important. As presented then the signs of multiple
terms (2 here) could lead to the situation where two large but opposite contributions
cancel each other, resulting in an underestimated error.
140
One way to resolve this issue would be to add the magnitudes of the terms on the rhs of
the equation. However, this is equivalent to having the errors contribution due to x and y
always reinforcing each other which is not realistic either. Instead, the conventional
solution is to square all of the terms, i.e.:
2
2
 ∂z 
 ∂z 
(∆z ) =   (∆x )2 +   (∆y )2
 ∂x 
 ∂y 
2
[5]
∆z in this equation is the overall error. The resulting errors are realistic and are often said
to have been combined in “quadrature” (quadrature is often used to mean squaring).
Example. Resistance, R = f(V,I) = V/I.
The aim is to show how the overall error for resistance is found using the values and
errors for voltage and current.
First consider the total derivative
∂R
∂R
1
V
R
R
∆R =
∆V +
∆I = ∆V −
∆I = ∆V − ∆I
∂V
∂I
I
V
I
I2
Rearranging
∆R ∆V ∆I
=
в€’
R
V
I
Squaring each term
 ∆R 
 ∆V 
 ∆I 
пЈ¬
пЈ· =пЈ¬
пЈ· +пЈ¬ пЈ·
пЈ­ R пЈё
пЈ­ V пЈё
пЈ­ I пЈё
2
2
2
This methodology used here for a quotient can be used generally and the more common
results are given in the next section.
4.2 Commonly occurring special cases
In the table below one or two measured parameters (A and B) and a constant k are
combined through addition, subtraction etc. to produce a result Z. The error ∆Z in Z is
then expressed in terms of the errors, ∆A and ∆B, in A and B respectively.
Table 1. Rules for finding errors when values are combined or functions used
Z=A+B
Z=A-B
(∆Z)2 = (∆A)2 + (∆B)2
Z=AB
Z=A/B
(∆Z/Z)2 = (∆A/A)2 + (∆B/B)2
Z = kA
∆Z = k∆Α
Z = k/A
∆Ζ = k∆A/A2
Z = An
∆Z/Z = n∆A/A
Z = ln A
∆Z = ∆A/A
Z = eA
∆Z/Z = ∆A
Note: to find the error when constants are present simply consider that the error in the
constant is zero.
Example: If the length of a rectangle is (1.24 В± 0.02) m and its breadth is (0.61 В± 0.01) m.
What is its area and the error in the area?
141
Here A = 1.24 m, ∆A = 0.02 m, B = 0.62 m, ∆B = 0.01 m, Z is the area and ∆Z is the
error in the area, found by combining errors.
Area, Z is the product of A and B, i.e. Z = AB = 0.7564 m2.
The appropriate rule is
(∆Z/Z)2 = (∆A/A)2 + (∆B/B)2
= (0.02/1.24)2 + (0.01/0.61)2
= 2.602 x 10-4 + 2.687 x 10-4 = 5.289 x 10-4
So that
∆Z/Z = 0.023
or
∆Z = 0.023 x 0.7564 = 0.0174 m2
So the area can be expressed as (0.756 В± 0.017) m2 or as 0.76 В± 0.02) m2.
4.3 Important notes on performing error calculations
Performing error calculations can be tedious and time consuming. But it has to be done
and it is worth paying attention to the numbers. It is inevitably true that different
parameters will have different contributions to the final error. Being aware of this can be
useful in at least two ways:
• Error contributions that are significantly smaller than others may reasonably be left
out of calculations, saving time. This is easily performed by comparing the relative
precision of the contributions, i.e. comparing ∆A/A with ∆B/B etc.
• The relative precision of the different contributions is instructive in indicating
weaknesses in the overall experiment, e.g. where to spend effort to find
improvements.
5. Multiple measurements (of a single parameter)
5.1 Introduction
As has already been mentioned, repeated or multiple measurements are important in
experimental work associated with the reduction of random errors. In fact one of the
cardinal rules of experimental work is that whenever possible repeat measurements should
be made.
This section is concerned with repeated measurement of a single parameter. The more
common situation for physics labs is where a variable is changed and the resulting x, y
data set plotted on a (preferably straight line) graph is dealt with later.
5.2 Importance of repeat or multiple measurements (of a single parameter)
A single measurement of a parameter relies on (often personal) estimates of an error based
on the equipment being used (for example on the smallest graduation of a meter or rule).
When repeated measurements are made:
• The second measurement acts as a check that the first one is reasonable, i.e. not
subject to gross error through carelessness.
• A relatively small number of repeats indicates the range within which the true value
lies.
• A relatively large number of repeats indicates the range and the distribution of
measurements - and allows the (random) error of the measurement to be reduced so
improving its precision.
If an estimate is made of the random error then repeated measurements can act as a test of
whether this was correct and therefore that the measurement was understood.
As the number of measurements, n increases from 1 to infinity the way that the data is
handled and error determined changes, however the mathematics follows statistically
142
accepted rules*. In the following discussion attention will be paid to the number of
measurements as this has clear experimental relevance. In teaching laboratories many
experiments involve n ~ 8 and it is possible get away with a superficial understanding of
statistics. In research the number of measurements tends to relate to the research field. In
astronomy there are large numbers of stars and galaxies to examine, n can be large and
there’s no escaping statistics.
* The terminology of statistics will be introduced without its mathematical justification in
this document (see statistics books or further reading for more maths).
5.3 Introduction to statistics (distributions, populations and samples)
In this section the terminology of statistics relating to data distributions is introduced and
related to experimental error analysis/determination.
5.3.1 Distributions
As number of measurements increases, in the absence of systematic errors, we expect the
mean to become closer to the true value. In other words it will always be the case that the
mean of a set of values is the best estimate of the true value (more on this below). It is
also reasonable to expect more values close to the true value than further away, i.e. the
distribution of measurements has a central tendency and is expected to peak at or close to
the true value. With a reasonable number of points the distribution can be plotted by
plotting the number of points that occur in a certain interval against the measurement
value. As the number of points increases the interval used can get smaller until, for an
infinite number (the limiting case), the distribution is continuous and is known as the
“limiting distribution”. An example of a (close to) limiting distribution is shown in
figure 3 below.
In figure 3 the y-axis shows the number of measurements having a given value
(continuous line) or number of measurements in a certain interval (bars). Often the y axis
shows either the fraction of measurements in a certain interval (bar charts) or the
probability of having a certain value(limiting distribution). This is achieved by
normalisation - dividing by the total number of measurements. The result of
normalisation is that the sum of all probabilities or the integral over all measured values
will be unity in both cases.
Figure 3. Distribution of a set of data. A continuous line and three bars are shown to
represent a large number of data points.
143
5.3.2 (Spectroscopic ) line-shapes
Very closely related to the distributions described in the previous section are line-shapes
of various origins, for example the intensity of atomic emission lines versus wavelength
or the amplitude of oscillation of a resonant mechanical system versus frequency.
Different although related terminology can be used to describe the two cases. The
statistical terminology for distributions will be discussed later but the general terminology
for line-shapes will be introduced here.
Figure 4 shows an intensity versus frequency line shape (actually the same shape as the
distribution in figure 3). On the assumption (as it is not shown) that the intensity falls to
zero well away from the “peak” the “full maximum” of the intensity is shown along with
its full width at half maximum (FWHM). “FWHM” being independent of the intensity of
the peak is a convenient and often quoted way to describe line-shapes features. A peak
that is symmetrical will often be characterised by its peak intensity, position (a frequency
in this case) and its FWHM. Note: The term “Half width” is sometimes used and has the
same meaning as FWHM - it can be understood to mean the width at half height.
An asymmetric peak (as figure 4 is) might be additionally characterised by its half width
at half maximum (HWHM) values either side of the peak position (i.e. that of the
maximum of the peak).
Figure 4. A (slightly) asymmetric line shape, perhaps of a spectroscopic feature with its
full maximum (i.e. intensity) its full width at half maximum (FWHM) and its half width
half maximum (HWHM).
5.3.3 Terminology: “Populations”, “samples” and real experiments
Returning to distributions, although it is the limiting distribution that characterises an
experiment, real experiments have a finite number of data points and the role of statistics
is to extract the best estimates of true values and associated errors. How this is achieved
will be discussed later, for now only the general principles will be of concern.
If the limiting distribution is viewed as resulting from all possible measurements then a
real experiment may be viewed as a limited “sample of all possible measurements”. A
single measurement then may take any value within the distribution and is more likely to
be found near to the peak, i.e. the mean or true value. In many experiments it’s possible
to conceive of an infinite number of repeats and this set of data is known as the
“population”. In other words a real experiment takes a “sample” of a “population” of
measurements.
144
The origin of the term population may be understood by thinking of statistics more
widely. For example surveys may be made of political views in Wales. Not all people
will be included, those that are constitute the “sample” whereas all possible people in
Wales constitute the “population”. Likewise, in astronomy a survey may consider a
sample of the (finite) population of galaxies.
5.3.4 Experimental information found from a distribution
Experimentally what is required from a sample is the best estimate of the true value,
sometimes also the shape of the limiting distribution but especially its (random) error:
• The best estimate of the true value is easy - it is simply the mean value of the
“sample”.
• The shape of the limiting distribution clearly is of interest because its width
corresponds to the “precision of the apparatus”* or the “experimental precision”* ,i.e.
in some sense it is a measure of how good the experiment is independent of the
sample size (although a large sample size is required to find it reliably).
• The random error (“precision of the experiment/measurement”*) not only improves
with increasing sample size but is also estimated differently depending on sample size.
* With two types of precision and wording that is ambiguous it is very easy to get
confused. The trick here is probably to be clear of the concept and don’t worry about the
terminology (if you come across wording that it not ambiguous please let us know).
5.3.5 Extraction of random error as a function of number of measurements (sample
size)
It is important to emphasise that here the concern is with cases where more than one
measurement is made and the random error is determined by analysing the distribution or
spread of data.
The following discussion concerns an increasing number of measurements(samples) of an
arbitrary experiment.
As mentioned previously a single measurement (n = 1) provides one sample of the
limiting distribution and although it is more likely to be close to the true value (rather than
out in the wings) occasionally the experimentalist will be unlucky.
Very quickly with n = 2,3,4.. averaging gives a lot more confidence in our estimate of the
true value and more importantly for errors starts to give an idea of the limiting
distribution. At this point the error will almost certainly be taken to be half the range or
spread of the values (because we quote В± error).
With a few more measurements a dilemma arises. The range/spread of values is likely to
increase whereas the random error should sensibly decrease. One valid approach which is
to use the range in which 50% of the values fall to indicate (twice) the error, this is known
as the “probable error”. This approach is illustrated in figure 5, it is a convenient
approach to use for 8 or 12 data points where the outer 4 or 6 points respectively can be
discarded.
145
Average (best estimate
of true value)
x
2∆x
Figure 5 Average value and probable error range from a set of eight data points
Probable error however, suffers a similar limitation to range and it does not progressively
decrease with increasing n. Neither is it a required step as statistical techniques
(described below) may be used. More importantly experimental work always requires
choices to be made and a good experimentalist will be clear on the method and the logic
applied in deciding on the approach used.
With a large numbers of measurements (let’s say n >> 10) and even before a well
defined distribution emerges statistical techniques are used - although cautiously because
this is the regime of small number statistics. With very high n and a well defined
distribution it is clear that its mean (our best estimate of the true value) can be found to
high precision. In fact its error approaches zero as the number of measurements
approaches infinity. What this is saying is that even when the precision of the experiment
is low with enough measurements a value can be found with a low error. But, as you
would expect it is easier to get a low error (i.e. using less measurements) when the
experimental precision is high - the precision of the experiment does matter. The next
section introduces the formal mathematics of this process.
Note: it isn’t easy to say how large n needs to be in order for a distribution to become well
defined. However, as a guide with n ~ 50 a it would be reasonable to draw a distribution
split into 4 or 5 intervals. If nothing else it should be clear from this that in order to
approach a limiting distribution n needs to be very large indeed.
5.4 Formal statistics (of distributions)
All experimental results are affected by random errors. In practice it turns out that in the
majority of cases the distribution function which best describes these random errors is the
“normal” or “Gaussian” distribution. Other mathematically described distributions
include “Poisson”, “Binomial” and “Lorentzian”. Distributions such as the one
presented in figure 3 may not have a basis in mathematics. However, all can be treated
with the same statistics.
Reminder: statistics work well with large but not small numbers of measurements - the
term “small number statistics” doesn’t have a poor reputation for nothing.
5.4.1 The mean
If n measurements of a quantity x are made and these are labelled x1, x2, x3,….xn then the
mean is given by:
146
xn =
1
1 n
( x1 + x2 + x3 + ... + x n ) = ∑ xi
n
n i =1
[6]
Often used alternative symbols for the mean, x n include x , Xn and Вµ.
5.4.2 Mean square deviation (variance) and standard deviation(s)
Clearly individual values of xi will differ from x n and these differences are intrinsically
linked to the nature of the distribution. The deviation of a particular measurement, xi from
x n is given by
Оґ i = xi в€’ x n
[7]
Clearly deviations may be either positive or negative and both the sum the mean
deviations will be zero. To avoid this the absolute value of mean deviations could be used
but it makes more sense mathematically to use the square of deviations. The sum of
square deviations would simply increase with the number of measurements whereas the
mean value would be expected to converge to a value representative of the limiting
distribution. The mean square deviation of n measurements, Пѓ ( xn ) 2 is known as the
“variance” and is given by
1 n
1
σ ( x n ) 2 = ∑ δ i2 = ∑ ( xi − x n ) 2
[8]
n i =1
n
From this it is a short step to the root mean square deviation, normally known as the
“sample standard deviation”, σn:
1 n
1
σ ( x n ) = [ ∑ δ i2 ] 1 / 2 = [ ∑ ( xi − x n )2 ] 1 / 2
[9]
n i =1
n
The term sample standard deviation is used since it is calculated from a sample of n
measurements - it is important to include the subscript. It is sometimes also written as Пѓn.
Note: although standard deviations can be calculated for small numbers of values it
doesn’t make sense to do so as discussed earlier.
The standard deviation is useful quantity as it has the same units as the measured value
and relates to the width of the distribution and is often described as the precision of the
measurement. However, as hinted above there is more to this story.
In the same way as it is the limiting value of the mean that represents the true value, it is
the limiting value of the sample standard deviation that is the standard deviation (and
represents the precision) of the experiment. It is also possible to conceive of a correction
to the sample standard deviation, Пѓn(x) to get a better estimate for the population standard
deviation Пѓ(x). This best estimate of the standard deviation is usually denoted sn(x).
(Again, because it is confusing) the three versions of standard deviation with their
meanings:
Sample standard deviation, Пѓn(x) - The standard deviation that can be calculated from n
measurements.
Standard deviation, σ(x) - The (unattainable) limiting or “true” value of standard
deviation, also quoted as the true precision of the experiment.
Best estimate (or adjusted) standard deviation, sn(x) - a variation of the sample
standard deviation, using Пѓ(xn) and n to get a best estimate of Пѓ(x). sn(x) is given by
147
1/ 2
пЈ« n пЈ¶
sn ( x ) = пЈ¬
пЈ·
пЈ­ n в€’1пЈё
Пѓ n ( x)
[10]
5.4.3 Standard error (standard deviation of the mean), Пѓ ( xn )
As discussed above, the standard deviation gives a measure of the width of a distribution,
whereas what is required is the error in the mean value, a value that can become very
small as the distribution is better known (through increasing the number of measurements
n).
The error in the mean will be taken as given by the “standard error”. Mathematically, the
standard error is found by finding the standard deviation of a number of samples of the
mean value. This explains why the symbol used appears very similar to that for standard
deviation.
If the limiting or true standard deviation is known (Пѓ(x)) then the standard error for n
measurements, Пѓ ( xn ) is given by
Пѓ( x )
Пѓ ( xn ) =
[11]
n1 2
However, the true standard deviation cannot be known, and so similar expressions may be
considered including either Пѓn(x) or sn(x.). Since the labelling is getting tricky/confusing
the same symbols will be used for standard error below but with words of explanation
attached:
Пѓ (x)
Пѓ ( xn ) = n
(standard error using sample standard deviation)
[12]
n1 2
Пѓ ( xn ) =
sn ( x )
n1 2
=
1/ 2
1 пЈ« n пЈ¶
пЈ¬
пЈ·
n1 2 пЈ­ n в€’ 1 пЈё
Пѓ n( x ) =
Пѓ n( x )
(n в€’ 1)1 2
(best estimate of standard error)[13]
Given that n will be quite large where it is applicable to use standard errors (i.e. when
distributions have emerged) there is little difference between the two expressions.
However, here it is now possible to state that the value for a measurement, X can be
expressed as
X = xn В± Пѓ ( xn )
[14]
In experimental terms the 1/n1//2 dependence of the standard error (for large n) indicates
that although it is possible to use repeats to find a value to high precision/small error this
is hard work and it is often better to work on improving the precision of the measurement.
5.5 Summary - what to use as the random error (precision) as a function of n
•
•
•
Single measurement - estimate of error.
Small number of measurements - whilst using best judgement: the range of the data
might be used for a very small number of measurements; with a few more
measurements (and possibly taking convenience into account) choose between
probable error and possibly standard deviation).
Large number of measurements - with the distribution emerging use standard error.
Some of the first year lab experiments are designed to illustrate how this works in
practice. However a guiding principle is to be open and clear about what error is chosen
and why.
148
6. Multiple measurements: straight line graphs (y = mx +c)
6.1 Introduction
The previous section discussed multiple measurements of the same value. However this
is not how undergraduate laboratory physics experiments are usually performed. If a
quantity y depends upon another x, then rather than fixing on a value of x and making
repeated measurements of the corresponding value of y, it is usually much more revealing
to vary x. The form of the dependence of y upon x is then most simply demonstrated by
plotting a graph. The statistics of repeat measurement in section 5 still applies but in a
modified form - think of the different points as being, in some sense, a repeat.
The understanding and use of graphs is an essential skill. Introductory teaching
laboratories concentrate on using straight line graphs, which are by far the easiest to
analyse, and great efforts are made to ensure that graphs emerge in this form.
6.2 Presenting experimental data on graphs
Scientific experiments examine cause and effect relationships where changing one
variable (known as the independent variable) causes a change in a second (dependent)
variable, both of which are measurable.
(Important: Conventionally the independent variable is plotted on the horizontal (x) and
the dependent variable is plotted on the vertical (y) axes of the graph respectively.)
For example, how the length of a spring depends upon the weight hung from its end may
be studied. The length is the dependent variable so it is plotted on the y axis, as in figure
6.
length / m
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
weight / N
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 6. Example graph, spring length versus weight (the line through the data is a “best
fit” line).
On the graph, as is quite common, a line through the data is shown. The meaning of any
such line should be made clear; in this case the figure caption indicates that the line is a
“best fit”. In other words it is the straight line that best represents the data and from
which information is extracted. In this case, from the gradient a value for the spring
constant may be determined. The alternative is that a line is a “guide to the eye”, this is a
line with no scientific meaning. In a lab diary this information can be given at any
convenient place on the graph, in a report inclusion in the figure caption is usually best.
Error bars can also be included on graphs, this is discussed in a later section.
6.3 Finding the Slope and Intercept (and their errors)
The equation for a straight line is given by:
y = mx + c
[15]
149
where m is the gradient (or slope) of the line and c is the intercept with the y axis. It is
necessary to find values and errors for both, and two approaches are possible.
6.3.1 The two approaches
By hand, where a graph (drawn in a lab diary) is analysed using the judgement of the
experimentalist. This approach, although subjective, gives students an understanding of
the process of data analysis and it keeps students “close” to the data. Both of these are an
essential part of the process of equipping students with the skills and experience to
develop as a scientist.
By computer, where the data is fed into software (such as EXCEL or coded in Python)
that graphs and analyses the data. This approach has the advantage of using well defined
statistical techniques and, in these terms at least, giving consistent answers. There are a
number of disadvantages not least that students lose their critical faculties and tend to
believe any number emerging from a PC or calculator (regardless of the quality or nature
of the data entered).
In the UG laboratories students generally use the by-hand approach until the end of the
year one autumn semester, but from then on computer analysis is gradually introduced.
6.3.2 Finding gradient, intercept and their errors by hand
The approach is illustrated in figure 7. Having judged the best straight line, the gradient
m and the intercept c can be determined. Two well separated arbitrary points on the best
fit line are determined (x1,y1 and x2,y2). This is a statement that it is the best fit line that
represents the experiment (students are often tempted to use extreme measured data points
- this is incorrect). From the two selected points the gradient can be calculated:
dy y 2 в€’ y1
m=
=
[16]
dx x 2 в€’ x1
c can then be found using the straight line equation, m and either of the two points (or
indeed any point on the best fit line):
c = y в€’ mx
[17]
For clarity a right angled triangle is drawn linking the two chosen points on the best fit
line.
Figure 7. Determining m (= dy/dx) from a best fit line. Note that x1 and x2 are points on
the best fit line , i.e. they are not data points.
150
Finding the errors is achieved by repeating the above procedure for one or two other
straight lines which are as far away in gradient (one larger, one smaller) from the data as
possible, but which are judged to be nevertheless still reasonably consistent with the
data. These are known as “worst possible fit lines” or “worst fit lines”. As shown in
figure 8 the lines should pivot about the approximate centre of the data points. These
lines provide two further values for m and c from which errors in m and c can be
estimated. With best and worst fit data the errors in m and c are given by:
error in m
∆݉ = ݉௪௢௥௦௧௙௜௧ − ݉௕�௦௧௙௜௧
[18]
error in c
∆ܿ = ܿ௪௢௥௦௧௙௜௧ − ܿ௕�௦௧௙௜௧
[19]
In practice it is allowable to use one worst fit line, this saves time and is justified since it
is error estimates that are found.
One approach to judging the position of the “worst fit” line is to draw (as shown by dotted
lines in figure 8) or imagine the presence of lines parallel to the best fit that encompass
the spread in y values above and below the best fit and have the same x range as the data. .
In effect these worst fit lines provide estimates of the possible range of deviations in m
and c. and whilst useful are extremely pessimistic.
Remembering back to Gaussian distributions arising from repeated measurements of the
same value, with more measurements the errors in m and c must decrease. Whereas, with
this simplistic approach, more measurements are likely to sample a larger spread about the
best fit line and therefore result in slowly increasing errors. When performing analysis
via computation, as described in the next section, standard errors in m and c that account
for the number of data points are found. This explains why errors found by hand are
much larger than those by computation.
Figure 8. Best and worst-possible fit lines used to estimate errors. The lines pivot about
the centre of the data range. The dotted lines have the same gradient as the best fit lines
but are at the extreme of the random error in the y values of the points.
Estimates of the standard errors in m and c and rough agreement with computation can be
found approximately by dividing the by-hand estimates by n1/2. where n is the number of
data points (dividing by (n-2)0.5 is probably better but the worst fit lines are generated by
eye so let’s not worry).
151
6.3.3 Finding gradient, intercept and their errors by computation
This section gives the mathematics for determining gradients, intercepts and their errors
using a linear regression technique known as least squares fitting of a straight line. It may
be useful to think of the best fit line as the “true value” with points distributed about it.
Given n pairs of experimental measurements (x1,yl), (x2,y2) ......... (xn,yn), which have a
fixed errors in the y-values but no, or insignificant, errors in x values*, the gradient (m)
and intercept on the y axis (c) of the best straight line (y = mx + c) through these points
can be found by minimising the squares of the distances of the points from the line in the
Oy direction. The minimum is found by differentiation and this leads to the analytical
expressions that follow.
With the summations from i = 1 to i = n and defining (following Squires)
the “residual” for the ith data point
d i = yi в€’ mxi в€’ c
(the deviation in y for each data point - from the best fit
line)
1
1
x = ∑ xi
y = ∑ yi
n
n
1
1
D = ∑ xi 2 - ( ∑ xi ) 2
E = ∑(xi yi ) - ∑ xi ∑ yi
n
n
1
F = ∑ yi 2 - ( ∑ y i ) 2
n
Then
E
1 ∑ d i2
1 DF в€’ E 2
m=
( ∆m )2 =
=
D
nв€’2 D
nв€’2
D2
c = y в€’ mx
( ∆c )2 =
2
2
2  ∑ di
2 пЈ¶ DF в€’ E
1 пЈ«D
1 пЈ«D
+
x
=
+
x
пЈ¬
пЈ·
пЈ¬
пЈ·
nв€’2пЈ­ n
nв€’2пЈ­ n
пЈё D
пЈё D2
Mathematical software might have this programmed in, but many, EXCEL for example,
give the “product-moment correlation coefficient”, R (actually R2 is usually given) that is
a quality of fit (with R = В± 1 or R2 = 1.0 representing a perfect fit/correlation). This is
insufficient as error values are required.
R2 =
E2
DF
With the constraint that the straight line is required to pass through the origin (0,0), c = 0,
the best value for m is
12
 ∑ y 2 − 2m ∑( x y ) + m 2 ∑ x 2 
i
i i
i
with error ( ∆m ) = 
пЈє
2
пЈЇпЈ°
пЈєпЈ»
∑ xi ( n − 1 )
However it isn’t at all clear when this may be used. It certainly should not be used on the
basis that an equation indicates that a straight line graph is expected to go through the
origin. A systematic error in the experiment might shift data such that the gradient is
unaltered but the line does not pass through the origin. Then the consequences of forcing
the line through the origin are to lose information on the presence of systematic errors and
at the same time to introduce a systematic error into the gradient.
Advice: There may be times when forcing a line to go through the origin is useful; so try
both approaches and then consider what the values tell you, i.e. be careful.
∑(x i y i )
m=
2
∑ xi
2
152
* This draws attention to an important point concerning statistical analysis. Insignificant
errors in the independent variable is often true experimentally (where the value of x is set
and the value of y measured) but it is also and is a necessary condition for the commonly
used statistical treatment of errors in gradient and intercept (software that calculates errors
in gradient and intercept almost certainly make this assumption). Treatments are much
more involved if the errors in both y and x are significant or if the error in individual
points varies.
6.4 Error bars (and outliers)
When plotting graphs it can sometimes be useful to include “error bars”. An error bar is
a way of drawing (an estimate of) the (random) error in the measured value of each data
point on the graph. It is illustrated in figure 9 for the case where only the errors in y are
significant and it is implied that the errors on x are insignificant. If the x error is
significant a horizontal bar should be included.
y
x
Figure 9. Example, use of error bars. The line is a best fit that excludes the outlier (the
point significantly below the best fit line and therefore ignored from the analysis).
Error bars are generally only included where there is a clear benefit compared to their
absence: not only do they take time to insert but they also complicate graphs (especially a
problem in lab diaries where best fit and worst fit lines (if drawn by hand) are present.
Before discussing the cases where there are “clear benefits of error bars” it is worth
dwelling on what they represent. It is possible to use error bars to represent random
errors, systematic errors, a combination of the two. Although convention is that they
represent random errors students will be expected to explain their origin and meaning of
the error bars whenever they use them.
6.4.1 When to use error bars
Testing understanding of the measurement
Suppose that the error bars in figure 9 were the estimated random error for a single
measurement. The fact that the scatter in the data points about the best fit line is of the
same size as the error bars supports the view that the experimental errors are well
understood. Error bars significantly larger than the scatter would be of concern.
Significance of deviations from theoretical curves
The theoretical curve that the data is compared to here is a straight line. Here error bars
make it easier to decide whether deviations from a straight line are significant or not.
(In scientific jargon anything that is “insignificant” is small enough to be ignored)
This is illustrated in figure 10 a and b which show the same set of data but with different
error bars. It will make more sense here to consider that the error bars result from
repeated, rather than single, measurements at each point. In addition note that the
153
arguments below apply whether the error bars represent the range, standard deviation or
standard error.
16
14
y values /a.u.
12
(a)
10
8
6
(b)
4
2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
x values /a.u.
Figure 10. (a) Data with best fit line and large error bars, (b) the same data shifted
(down) with small error bars (a.u. - arbitrary units)
As with any experiment there is scatter in the data. In figure 10a the error bars all
encompass the straight line and therefore the deviations from the best fit line cannot be
considered significant. By contrast in figure 10b with smaller error bars the deviations
must be considered significant and the implication is that either: (i) the theoretical model
is incorrect or (ii) that there are additional unknown or unconsidered experimental factors
causing a deviation.
The above discussion illustrates both the importance of careful consideration of errors and
also that extra information is revealed as errors are reduced.
Final note: here the deviation of a number of data points was considered. The significant
deviation of a single data point is treated a little differently (see also outliers below).
Significant errors in both y and x and a variation of size of error bars
Since the commonly used analytical method of determining line of best fit and errors in m
and c is based on the errors in each point being significant only in y then the cases where
this does not apply need to be treated with care. A first step towards dealing with (or at
least acknowledging) this is to provide x as well as y error bars when appropriate.
The error analysis required when the errors are significant in both x and y is beyond the
scope of this document.
Similarly the commonly used analysis assumes that the y errors are the same for each data
point and a first step towards acknowledging when this is not so might be to show these
varying error bars.
Situations where varying errors may occur:
• Errors based on repeat measurements will vary if the number of repeats is varied.
• Some experimental conditions might naturally lead to varying errors (for example, the
determination of frequency from a fixed number of oscillations).
• When combining measurements to obtain a “y” value.
154
6.4.2 Outliers
Returning to figure 9 in drawing the best fit line only 5 points were taken into
consideration, whilst the 6th (the point below the line) was excluded. An excluded point
is known as an “outlier” and clearly points should not be categorised as outliers lightly.
Potential outliers may sometimes occur due to a mistake in a reading or the setting of an
experimental condition and care must be taken when dealing with them. Working on the
assumption that the first indication of a presence was on plotting a graph (probably in a
lab diary):
• First check that all arithmetic and the plotting of the data point was performed
correctly.
• Do not rub the point out or ignore it - apart from anything else it may in fact be
correct.
• Make a decision about whether to include or exclude the point from analysis (i.e.
whether it is treated as an outlier or not) and indicate this clearly.
• If possible determine whether an error was made in the measurement - by going back
and performing repeats (this isn’t usually possible in year 0 and 1 labs, is often
possible in year 2 and is essential in year 3 and 4 projects).
• The earlier an outlier is spotted the easier it is to perform repeat measurements. This
is aided by drawing graphs as quickly as possible. The ultimate is to draw graphs as
you go along. Computers are very useful here but very rough sketch graphs are useful
alternate.
Consideration of whether a point should be considered as an outlier takes us back to error
bars. In figure 9 it is somehow reassuring that the line of best fit passes through the 5
good data points within their error range as indicated by their error bars. It appears
reasonable to ignore the outlier in the determination of the best fit line because it would be
impossible to include this point on the same basis (although with much larger error bars
the outlier might be included). However, the scatter in the data is also sufficient to make
this judgement and in reality the error bars do not add anything.
6.4.3 Dealing with a small numbers of data points
Clearly it is better to have many data points rather than few but what are the implications
of cases when this isn’t possible? Return to figure 9 and consider having not 6 but 3 or
even 4 data points one of which is the outlier:
• The scatter in the data is not obvious from the points alone.
• (Correct) error bars become more important.
• It is difficult or impossible to identify outliers.
• The values obtained for m and c are (almost always) less accurate and their errors
larger.
6.5 Forcing lines to be straight
It is almost always possible to manipulate the mathematical form of data such that an
easily analysed straight line results when it is plotted. Essentially the approach is to
obtain a relationship in the form y = mx + c. A simple example and two experimentally
very important examples are given in table 1.
155
Table 1. Example methods for making straight line plots
Function
y = 2x2
W = kTn
y = Ae-E/kT
Plot (y = mx + c)
y vs x2
log10W vs log10T
(log10W = log10(kTn)
= nlog10T + log10k)
lny vs 1/T
Comments
A very simple example
Used in determining unknown power
relationships (finding n).
Known as an “Arrhenius plot” it is used when
considering thermally activated processes
with an activation energy (E).
7. Some experimental considerations
It is too large a subject to consider what constitutes a good experiment, i.e. one that can be
believed. Here a flavour will be provided by first introducing some of the terminology
that is used before providing two useful examples making use of what has gone before.
7.1 Terminology
The “reliability” of a measurement relates to its consistency. Otherwise known as the
“repeatability” of a measurement, it is the extent to which an instrument can provide the
same value for nominally the same measurement (i.e. the same subject under the same
conditions).
The “validity” of the findings of an experiment refers the extent to which the findings can
be believed to be right. For a particular experiment this depends on the rigor with which
the study was conducted (as assessed through the experimental design, its reliability and
the care in its execution) but also the extent to which alternative explanations were
considered.
7.2 Comparing results with accepted values
In the year 0,1 and 2 teaching laboratories, it is common for measurements to be made of
known values (such as g) allowing a comparison with the results obtained. A downside of
this is that students may perceive that the result (being already known) is not important
and instead the point is practice of a technique and seeing physics in action. This is
incorrect, whatever the result, it sheds light on the experiment.
Remember that any result is presented as: (measured value +/- error) units. This allows
comparison with the known values and if the two agree within errors (i.e. within the error
range of the measured value) then there is nothing more to say. However, if the two do
not agree within errors there must be a reason and it is necessary to consider what this
might be.
Candidates include:
• Systematic errors in the measurement or equipment.
• Misjudged random errors.
• Poor experimental technique.
• Poor or inappropriate (possibly oversimplified) theory.
If the reason for the discrepancy is properly understood and subsequently included then
agreement should be possible. Whilst such an extra analysis is likely to be beyond the
expectations for 0 and 1st year labs it is important that students think about the situation,
and it is often true that the reason for the discrepancy is known in principle.
A link can also be made to more advanced work where it is essential that accurate
measurements of unknown values are made. If measurements of known values (possibly
156
standard samples or “standards”) are made first then any systematic errors can be
corrected for. The known samples provide a way of calibrating the instrument.
7.3 y = mx relationships
Previous discussion of straight line graphs have been concerned with the general case (y =
mx + c relationships). However, many expected relationships are of the form y = mx, in
other words the graph produced is expected to go through the origin. This is worth
special consideration as it often causes confusion for inexperienced experimentalists.
The main issue is that students not only include the origin as a data point but also give it
special significance by forcing the best fit line to go through the it (whether by hand or on
a computer).
One of the classic systematic errors is a zero offset the effect of which is to produce a
constant (solid) shift of all data point either up or down whilst leaving the gradient (from
which most information is found) unaffected. Excluding the origin from analysis allows
the y intercept to be compared to zero and so the significance of a possible zero offset to
be considered. The alternative such as forcing the best fit line through the origin both
removes evidence for a possible zero offset and if there is one alters the gradient so
introducing an (illegitimate) error into the gradient.
8. Some important distributions
A number of distributions are observed in experiments, three important ones described
here are the Gaussian (or Normal), Poisson and Lorentzian. The former two distributions
can be related to the Binomial distribution and so this is introduced first.
In all cases the probability function P is given using x, Вµ and Пѓ as the measured value, the
mean and standard deviation of the distribution respectively. The functions are
normalised such that ∫−∞∞ F ( x)dx = 1 .
8.1 Binomial statistics
Binomial statistics describe certain situations where results of physical measurements can
have one of a number of well-defined values - such as when tossing coins or throwing
dice. Consider a situation where the result of one physical measurement of a system has a
probability p of giving a particular result. If an experiment is carried out on n such
systems, then the probability that x of the systems will produce the required result is given
by.
P ( x, n, p ) =
n!
p x (1 в€’ p )(n в€’ x )
x! (n в€’ x )!
An example: The probability of throwing a six with one dice is 1/6. If we throw 4 dice
we may obtain 0,1,2,3 or 4 sixes. The probability of obtaining zero sixes is given by
substituting in equation 1 above so that
0
( 4в€’0 )
1пЈ¶
4!
пЈ«
пЈ«1пЈ¶ пЈ«5пЈ¶
Probability of zero sixes with 4 die = PпЈ¬ 0 ,4 , пЈ· =
= 0.48
пЈ¬ пЈ· пЈ¬ пЈ·
6 пЈё 0! ( 4 в€’ 0 )! пЈ­ 6 пЈё пЈ­ 6 пЈё
пЈ­
Similarly the probability of throwing one six is
1
1пЈ¶
4!
пЈ«
пЈ«1пЈ¶ пЈ«5пЈ¶
PпЈ¬1,4, пЈ· =
пЈ¬ пЈ· пЈ¬ пЈ·
6 пЈё 1! ( 4 в€’ 1 )! пЈ­ 6 пЈё пЈ­ 6 пЈё
пЈ­
( 4 в€’1 )
= 0.386 etc
157
For this distribution the mean value is np and the standard deviation is
np(1 в€’ p)
8.2. The normal (or Gaussian) distribution
As already mentioned the distribution function which best describes random errors in
experiments is the “normal” or “Gaussian” distribution. This distribution is an
approximation to the binomial distribution for the special limiting case where the number
of possible different observations is infinite and each has a finite probability so that
np>>1.
The normalised probability function P(x) given by:
пЈ® в€’ ( x в€’ xn )2 пЈ№
1
1
P(x) =
exp пЈЇ
пЈє
2ПЂ Пѓ n ( x )
пЈЇпЈ° 2Пѓ n 2 ( x ) пЈєпЈ»
where, as before, x is the measured value x n is the mean of the sample and Пѓ ( xn ) is the
P(x)
sample standard deviation and the function is normalised such that ∫−∞∞ P( x )dx = 1 . As
the example figure A1.1 shows the function is (characteristically) bell shaped and
symmetrical.
0.45
0.4
0.35
0.3
0.25
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.05
0
FWHM
FWHM
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
x
Figure 11 Gaussian probability function generated using x n = 0 and Пѓ(x) = 1 resulting in
the x-axis being in units of standard deviation. The FWHM for the distribution is also
shown and can be seen to be wider than 2Пѓ(x).
If x n and Пѓ n ( x) are known the whole distribution function can be drawn and the
probability of measurements occurring in a given range can be determined. The integral
of the Gaussian function cannot be performed analytically and so many statistics books
will contain look-up tables, a summary version of which is presented in table 2.
Table 2. The Integral Gaussian or Normal probability
Range either side of mean,
Expected percentage of values in range
in terms of +/-m Пѓn(x)
m=0
0%
m=1
68.3%
m=2
95.4%
m=3
99.73%
m=4
99.994%
158
From this table it can be seen that quoting an error of +/- Пѓn(x) would cover a range in
which ~68% of the values fall which will therefore give a similar estimate of error as the
“probable error” in which 50% of the values fall. The FWHM is also worth considering
in this context as experimentally it is often more direct and convenient to deal with then
standard deviation. It is clear from figure 11 that the FWHM covers a little more than the
range of +/- σn(x) (in fact FWHM = 2 2 ln( 2 )σ ( x n ) ≈ 2.355....σ ( x n ) ).
This
corresponds to a range in which ~76% of the values fall. Any of these three might be
used as an estimate of the error - in the case where a small number of measurements have
been performed.
8.3 Poisson distribution
The Poisson distribution is the limiting case of a binomial distribution when the possible
number of events (n) tends to infinity and the probability of any one event (p) tends to
zero in such a way that np is a constant. The normalised distribution is given by:
Вµ x eв€’Вµ
P(x) =
x!
where P(x) is the probability of obtaining a value x, when the mean value is Вµ. The
standard deviation for a Poisson distribution is Вµ . This distribution is unlike the normal
or Gaussian distribution in that it becomes highly asymmetrical as the mean value
approaches zero.
Poisson distributions are often appropriate for counting experiments where the data
represents the number of events observed per unit time interval. A gram of radioactive
material may contain ~1022 nuclei whereas the number that disintegrate in each time
interval is many order of magnitudes smaller.
This covers a very wide range of physics experiments:
• In the teaching labs - radioactive decay, x-ray absorption and fluorescence.
• More widely - Spectroscopy, particle physics (such as at the LHC), astronomy.
Counting experiments: the “signal to noise” ratio
In all counting experiments the “quality” of the data is expected to “improve” with
increasing counting time and counts. This can be understood as follows: the mean
number of counts in the experiment, µ, is the “signal” whilst statistical variations in this
signal are represented by the standard deviation σ(x) and can be thought of as “noise”.
In Poisson statistics Пѓ(x) = Вµ therefore the signal/noise = Вµ / Вµ = Вµ , i.e. the ratio
increases with the square root of the number of counts. This is an often quoted and very
important finding for understanding and designing experiments.
Put another way, if in a particular counting period an average of N counts are obtained,
the associated standard deviation is в€љN (ignoring any errors introduced by timing
uncertainties, etc). Clearly, the larger N the more precise the final result. For a given
source and geometrical arrangement, however, N can be increased only by counting for
longer periods of time.
8.4 Lorentzian distribution
This distribution is important as it describes data corresponding to resonance behaviour.
This includes mechanical and electrical systems but also the shape of spectral lines
occurring in atomic and nuclear spectroscopy.
159
The Lorentzian distribution is symmetric about the mean, is usually characterised by its
full width at half maximum Γ (aka “half width”) rather than by its standard deviation and
is given by
P( x, Вµ , О“ ) =
1
О“/2
ПЂ (x в€’ Вµ )2 + (О“ / 2)2
where P(x,Вµ,О“) is the probability of obtaining a value x, when the mean value is Вµ.
A characteristic of the distribution is that is has “heavy tails”, i.e. it falls away slowly for
large deviations. A consequence of this is that it is not possible to define a standard
deviation for this function.
It should be noted that a number of broadening mechanisms may be effective in
spectroscopic experiments and some of these, such as Doppler broadening and also the
resolution of the system may be Gaussian in nature. What is measured may therefore be a
convolution of a Lorentzian and a Gaussian function resulting in a so called “Voigt”
profile. Experimentally, it is usual to start by assuming a Gaussian line shape, deviations
away from this in the tails is often good evidence of a Lorentzian contribution.
160
III.3 USING MICROSOFT EXCEL and WORD
You will be required to usebasic graph plotting and wrd processing packages throughout
your undergraduate studies and on into the rest of your life so you should gain familiarity
with using them as quickly as possible. All Cardiff Univeristy networked compters carry
the Microsoft suite, although you can certainly use other packages if you would rather.
However we will teach you (and can provide guidance with) Word and Excel software.
To further assist you in this, we have provided via Learning Central a number of
screencasts that you mayfind useful:
The Basics of Scientific Reports;
More on Scientific Reports;
Using Excel - graphs;
Using Word – Equation Editor;
Using Word – formatting.
USING EXCEL
1. Determining errors from straight line graphs using EXCEL
Instructions
• Input the data to be analysed into an EXCEL spreadsheet in column form.
• Select a 2x2 array of cells anywhere in the spreadsheet (these are the ones highlighted
in the figure below).
• In the function/command line type “=linest( ” - presumably “linest” stands for line
statistics.
• Opening the bracket leads EXCEL to prompt for
known_y’s
simply select using mouse, then insert a comma.
known+x’s
simply select using mouse, then insert a comma.
const
input 1 (using 0 would force line through the origin) and a
comma.
stats
input 1 (this sets the correct statistics) and close the bracket.
• The command line should look something like:
=LINEST(A5:A14,B5:B14,1,1)
• To execute the calculation press CTRL,SHIFT and ENTER
• Values for m and c and their errors should appear in the selected 2x3 array in the
format shown in the figure below. The “m”, “c” “errors” “R^2” and “reg error”
labels have been added for clarity.
• In this case the gradient is m = 2.60 ± 0.04 and the intercept is c = -1.2 ± 1.6, i.e. the
straight line passes through the origin within the (standard) error.
• R^2 is the same value as appears on graphs when adding trend lines: it is a correlation
coefficient indicating how good a straight line the data represents.
• “Reg Error” is short for “regression error”; it is the standard error of the measured y
values compared to the best fit y values. It is analogous to the standard error for
repeated measurements of the same value where values are then compared to the mean
of the values.
161
Least squares fitting of straight line data
The data
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
x^2
0
1
4
9
16
25
36
49
64
81
y
0
2
11
21
42
63
93
120
162
216
m
c
2.60301 -1.18577
0.042074 1.647517
0.997914 3.572721
R^2
reg error
errors
Figure Appearance of EXCEL spreadsheet when determining errors in a straight line
graph. The selected 2x3 array of cells (in which values were eventually returned) are
highlighted.
2. Making graphs in EXCEL 2007
EXCEL 2007 is substantially different from previous versions and this has caused
students (and staff) some problems: there are more options so things are generally a bit
more difficult to find.
To help, some guidance on basic graphing tasks is given below.
To make a basic graph
• Select two or more columns of data either by clicking and dragging or by selecting a
column holding down control and selecting additional columns. The left hand column
will be the data for the x-axis no matter what order the data is selected.
• Select “insert” on the toolbar
• Select type of graph (usually “scatter”).
To add titles*
• With graph selected, in “chart tools” click on “Layout”.
• Here click on “axis title”. For the y axis (primary vertical axis title) it is probably best
to use “rotated title”.
• You may also want to add a “chart title” (for your diary but not for inclusion in
reports!).
*You don’t seem to be able to add equations to titles but you can use Word-like
formatting: “CTRL =” for subscripts, “CTRL +” for superscripts.
To change the range of data shown
• Either select the axis or choose “format axis”.
• Or, under “Layout” choose “Axes”, then the axis of interest, then (at the bottom of the
list) “More… axis options”.
162
•
Under “axis options” change minimum and/or maximum to fixed (from auto) and
select desired value(s).
Formatting data series (line and marker)
• Right click on the required data series on the graph and then choose “format data
series” and choose from the “series options”.
• For example to change marker size choose “marker options” set marker type to “built
in” then set “size”.
• Alternatively, with the graph selected: under “layout” the required data series can be
selected by use of the drop down box in “current selection” (on the left of the toolbar).
163
III.4 REPORTING ON EXPERIMENTAL WORK
AN EXAMPLE OF HOW TO WRITE A LONG REPORT
1. Introduction
Scientific report writing is a skill, the application of numerous rigid conventions, in
combination with a surprising degree of freedom in structure, combined to achieve clarity
of presentation.
Physics students will write such reports at a rate of approximately one per semester
throughout their undergraduate University career. For many students the feedback this
provides may be insufficient for them to efficiently get to grips with what is required and
expected. The document is based around a specimen report the examination of which is
intended to help students in writing long reports.
“Galileo’s Rolling Ball Experiment” is a Preliminary (Year 0) experiment and also a
classic experiment of physics. It is performed in a three hour laboratory session in which
students are required to both take and analyse their data (diaries are handed in at the end
of the session). It is a simple experiment used to help develop data handling and error
analysis for people some of whom are new to performing physics experiments for
themselves. Consequently the report is rather basic.
Following this introduction, the main body of the report is split into three sections:
2. Teaching Laboratory instructions for the experiment
3. The specimen report based on students’ laboratory diaries
4. A final section on report writing that discusses some of the finer points and the
School’s changing expectations of students as they progress through their Physics courses.
2. Teaching Laboratory instructions for the experiment
G2
GALILEO'S ROLLING BALL EXPERIMENT
Reference: Duncan, Chapter 7, Statics and Dynamics, Chapter 8 Circular motion and
gravitation
Equipment List: Metal channel, retort stand, ball bearings and box, stopwatch, metre rule.
Introduction
Galileo Galilei made observations in astronomy and mechanics that were of major
importance to the development of 17th century science. Perhaps Galileo's most famous
experiment, which was supposed to involve the leaning tower of Pisa, was his verification
that all bodies, independent of their mass, fall at the same rate (if the bodies are heavy
enough that air resistance is negligible). We shall look at here one of Galileo's less famous
but closely related experiments which conveniently does not require dropping weights
from the tower of Pisa!
164
Galileo performed an experiment on a falling body that 'diluted' the effects of gravity, by
letting the body roll down a slope. Galileo predicted and was able to show experimentally
that in this case:
1) No matter what the angle Оё (this is the Greek letter theta) of the slope, the speed of the
object at the bottom of the slope depends only on the total height h it has fallen through.
2) The speed of the object increases in proportion to the time it has travelled.
3) For a given angle of the slope, the vertical height h fallen is proportional to the square
of the time it has travelled.
Since this was true for all the slopes that Galileo was able to measure, by imagining the
steepness of the slope to be increased until it was vertical he predicted that these rules
would be true for a freely falling body.
Imagine yourself in Galileo's position. Mechanical watches had not yet been invented. He
had to use 'water clocks' in which time was measured by water escaping from the bottom
of a conical container. Standards of length differed across Europe. Also, he calculated, not
with decimal fractions, but with whole number ratios. (See the article by S Drake in the
American Journal of Physics, p302, volume 54, April 1986, if you are interested in the
historical details). Your experiment here will be rather easier than Galileo's!
Start (t=0)
h
Оё
Finish
In this experiment we shall be concerned with investigating the third statement only.
Referring to the above diagram, Galileo's third statement can be expressed mathematically
as
h О± t2
(if Оё is fixed)
(Eq. 1)
Here t is the time for the object to roll from the start to the finish, and the symbol О± means
"is proportional to". (The constant of proportionality depends on the strength of the
Earth's gravity and the angle of the slope). The aim of this experiment is therefore to
check the above relation.
The experiment provides a good introduction to taking measurements, presenting
information in tabular and graphical form, and the consideration of errors of
measurement. Additionally, you will need to relate your experimental data to theory
presented in a mathematical form.
165
Experiment (read this to the end before you start)
You are provided with a channel which can be inclined at any angle. You should use the
following procedure, making sure you record all the details in your laboratory notebook.
STEP 1 - First fix the value of Оё at a value between 2 and 15 degrees. (If Оё is too large
then it is difficult to time the fast-moving ball, whilst if it is too small the effects of
friction will be more important).
Measure sin Оё for the slope and estimate its error (see below). Since all your
measurements will be made at the same angle it is very important to perform this
carefully. In subsequent calculations you will use sin Оё and its error but you should also
find Оё пЂ пЂ and its error) at this point
STEP 2 - Hold the ball at a convenient position along the channel and measure h.
STEP 3 - Measure the time t that it takes the ball to roll down the slope for a starting
height h. Repeat the measurement 3 times and record each result.
STEP 4 - Repeat steps 2 and 3 for eight different values of the starting height h. Make
sure that you neatly tabulate every measurement that you make (not just the averages).
Your table should have the following columns:
Height
/m
...
...
...
h t1/ sec
...
...
...
t2/ sec
t3 / sec
t1ВІ/ sec2
t2ВІ/ sec2
t3ВІ / secВІ
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
t2
(average) /
sec2
Always include the units when you write down any numerical value.
Some suggestions
It is difficult to accurately measure the angle Оё with a protractor! The best way to find it
is to measure H (the change in height of the end of the channel above the bench) and D
(the total length of the channel) shown in the diagram below. (Do not confuse the symbol
h with H or d with D, also shown on the diagram!) Then sin Оё = H/D, so you can
calculate Оё . Remember to tabulate all the measurements you make, not just Оё
D
H
h
d
Оё
166
Precision Estimates
In all measurements you make, you should write down the precision of the measurement ie could you measure h, H and D to the nearest millimetre, centimetre, or metre? (This
depends on how you measure the quantity as well as the fineness of divisions on the metre
rule. For example, can you tell exactly where the centre of the ball bearing is, and can you
position the ruler easily? The golden rule is use common sense when estimating the
precision of a measurement.
Analysis
Equation 1 can be written in another, exactly equivalent, form:
tВІ = K Г— h
(if Оё is fixed)
(Eq. 2)
Because tВІ is proportional to h, a graph of tВІ (plotted on the vertical axis) against h (plotted
on the horizontal axis) should give a straight line, which passes through the origin, with a
gradient equal to the constant K.
STEP 1 - From your data in the tables of tВІ and h, plot a graph for your value of Оё .
STEP 2 - Draw a straight line, which best fits the data points. Work out the gradient of
this line (don't forget the units). Draw the 'error lines' and so work out the error in the
gradient. Does your best fit line pass through the origin?
The data you took can be used to work out the acceleration due to gravity, g. This can be
done since the constant K in equations 1 and 2 is, according to theory (see appendix),
related to g and sin пЂ by the formula:
K = 2 / (g sinВІ Оё)
(Eq. 3)
So, to find g, just do the following: Work out sin Оё (it's just equal to H/D) and K (the
gradient of the corresponding graph you plotted) and substitute into equation 3, after
rearranging it to make g the subject of the equation. Be careful to make sure you know
what units K is measured in.
What value of g do you get? Even taking errors into account* the value is probably
around half the accepted value of 9.8 ms-ВІ ? Can you think of any reason why this should
be so?
(* If you need to, ask a demonstrator to explain how to calculate the errors in g - you will
need to estimate the experimental error in each of the things that was used to find g, ie the
individual errors in sinОё and K, and then combine the errors. Actually, you will probably
find there is comparatively little error in sinОё so that most of the error is in finding K.)
Appendix
Read this at home, not in the laboratory class. You may find it useful in conjunction with
your Mechanics lectures.
167
Suppose a body slides, without friction, down a slope of inclination Оё :
mg sin Оё
h
mg
Оё
Finish
The component of the force on the mass m parallel to the slope is mg sin Оё , so the
acceleration of the body parallel to the slope is
a = F/m = g sin Оё
Using the formula "s = ut + atВІ /2" means that the distance moved to the bottom of the
slope in a time t is just (u=0 if the body starts at rest)
d = g sin Оё Г— tВІ /2
But sin Оё = h/d or d = h/sin Оё , so we finally get
h = g sinВІ Оё tВІ /2
(Eq. 4)
This equation is therefore the same as equation 2, since we can re-arrange it as
tВІ = 2 h /g sinВІ Оё
(Eq. 5)
So, comparing directly to equation 3, we have K = 2/(g sinВІ Оё ), as stated earlier.
168
3. The specimen report based on students’ laboratory diaries
(A report based on measurements made by a Foundation Engineering Student taking
PX0102 in October 2006)
Galileo’s Rolling Ball Experiment
Date January 2007
Author: Cardiff University, School of
Physics and Astronomy
Abstract
Galileo’s rolling ball experiment was performed in which the motion of a ball bearing
down a shallow incline, of angle П‘ = 3.52 +/- 0.03 degrees, was timed as a function of the
starting height of the ball. Starting heights between 0.035 and 0.070 m resulted in travel
times in the range 1.90 – 2.90 s. As expected, a graph of the square of the time of travel
versus starting height was a straight line that passed through the origin. The gradient
would be expected to be 2/g.sin2 П‘ , where g the acceleration due to gravity, assuming that
the gravitational potential energy was entirely converted to translational kinetic energy.
The value of the gradient was found to be 113+/-19 s2.m from which a value for g of 4.76
+/- 0.12 m.s-2 was determined that is approximately a factor of two lower than the
accepted value of 9.81 m.s-2. The discrepancy can be attributed to the fact that as the ball
rolls down the incline gravitational potential energy is converted not only into
translational but also into rotational kinetic energy.
1. Introduction
Galileo Galilei was a seventeenth century Italian scientist who made many important
observations in astronomy and mechanics [1]. His most famous experiment on the effects
of gravity involved dropping weights from the tower of Pisa and showed that all bodies
fall at the same rate independent of their mass. In the rolling ball experiment [2] in which
a ball rolls down an incline, the effects of gravity are easier to quantify since the travel
times are increased.
Using this experiment Galileo showed that: (i) the speed of the object at the bottom of the
slope depends only on the height it has fallen through, (ii) that the speed of the object
169
increases in proportion to the time it has traveled and (iii) for a given angle of slope, the
vertical height fallen through is proportional to the square of the time it has travelled.
The experiment performed here was concerned only with the last statement.
2 Background Theory
A schematic of the experiment in which an object of mass m acted upon by gravity
(acceleration due to gravity is g) on an incline is illustrated in figure 1 below.
d
m.g.sinОё
m.g
h
Figure 1. Schematic of an object on an inclined plane. The plane is at an angle П‘ to the
horizontal and the force due to gravity acting down the slope is m.g.sin П‘ .
For an incline at an angle П‘ , although the force vertically downwards is m.g the force
parallel to the slope is m.g.sin П‘ . This is the force that accelerates the body down the
slope the acceleration, a being given by:
a=
force m.g . sin Оё
=
= g . sin Оё
mass
m
(1)
If the body starts at rest (initial velocity zero) and travels a distance d (for example to the
bottom of the slope) the relationship between the time taken and distance travelled is
given by the well known equation of motion:
d=
1 2
a.t
2
d=
or
1
g . sin Оё .t 2
2
(2)
In addition, if h is the change in height the object undergoes by travelling a distance d
down the slope then it is clear from figure 1 that:
sin Оё =
h
d
(3)
Note that as h is defined in figure 1 the object would start at the top of the slope.
Substituting for d in equation 3 and rearranging gives:
t2 =
2
g .sin 2 Оё
.h
(4)
170
Equation 4 confirms Galileo’s third statement and indicates that a graph of the square of
the travel time versus height should be a straight line that passes through the origin. In
addition, if the angle of the slope is known the value of the gradient can be used to
determine a value for the acceleration due to gravity.
This is the experiment that has been performed. Whilst Galileo performed the experiment
for a range of slope angles, here only one has been used.
3. Description of the Experiment
The “slope” was provided by a right angled channel, held by a retort stand down which a
ball bearing could roll. After fixing the slope its angle was found (by way of measuring
its elevation and length) to be 3.52 +/- 0.03 degrees. The ball bearing was placed on the
slope at a particular height and its time to travel down the slope was measured by hand
with a stopwatch. The measurement was performed three times for each height and at
eight different heights. One person released the ball at the set height and a second person
timed the descent. The timing error for a single measurement was initially estimated to be
+/-0.5 s however the spread of times found in the repeated measurements was usually
only +/-0.1 s. The error in the release height of the ball bearing was +/- 1 mm. The range
of heights used was 0.035 to 0.070 m resulting in travel times in the range ~1.9 to 2.9 s.
4. Results
A graph of the average squared travel time against release height is shown in figure 2.
The data is a reasonable straight line with some scatter about the best fit line. By drawing
best and worst possible fits by hand the gradient of the line was found to be 113 +/- 19
s2.m-1. These lines indicated that within errors the data is a straight line through the origin
[3] as expected from equation 4 and indicating that any systematic errors are small
compared to random errors.
Time squared /s 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
Height /m
Figure 2. Graph of the average of the travel times squared versus the release height. The
straight line here is a computer generated best fit to the data3.
From the gradient and the angle of slope a value for the acceleration due to gravity, g, was
determined (using equation 5) to be 4.76 +/- 0.12 m.s-2.
5. Discussion
171
Although the results of the experiment do show that for the single angle of slope used, the
vertical height fallen through is proportional to the square of the time it has traveled, the
derived value for g does not agree with the accepted value of 9.81 m.s-2 within graphical
errors. The obtained value of g is approximately half of the expected value, whereas the
error is only ~10%. The discrepancy is therefore much larger than can apparently be
explained by random errors associated with the measurement and therefore needs to be
considered further.
The sources of measurement error include distances (for the height of release and the
angle of the slope) and timing (for the travel time). Neither the meter rule nor the
stopwatch are likely to have appreciable intrinsic errors associated with them. The use of
the rule to determine heights and angles has relatively small errors as discussed above and
no errors have been found in calculations. The estimated absolute timing error (+/- 0.5 s)
arose from consideration of matching the start of the stopwatch with the release of the ball
bearing and its stop with the ball reaching the bottom of the slope. The fact that this error
appears significantly larger than the spread of travel times in repeated measurements (0.1
s) obtained from repeat measurements indicates that there may be a systematic error in
starting and stopping the watch. However, a systematic error of up to +/- 0.5 s would do
little to improve the agreement between the measured acceleration and g.
The explanation for the results obtained lies in the realization that whereas it is true that it
is the translational acceleration down the slope that is measured by this experiment it is
not true that the gravitational force acting down the slope is only converted into this form
of motion. As the title of the experiment states the ball rolls down the hill implying that it
has both translational and rotational motions. In other words the gravitational potential
energy of the ball is converted into both translational and rotational kinetic energy. It
should be possible to reanalyze the results here incorporating the effects of rotational
motion but this is beyond the scope of this report.
6. Conclusions
Galileo’s rolling ball experiment has been performed in which the motion of a ball
bearing down a shallow incline of angle 3.52 +/- 0.03 degrees. Assuming that
gravitational potential energy is entirely converted to translational energy of the ball the
value the value for g was determined to be g = 4.76 +/- 0.12 m.s-2. This value is
approximately a factor of two lower than the expected value. The discrepancy is almost
certainly mainly caused by the fact that gravitational potential energy is converted into
rotational as well as translational kinetic energy as the ball rolls, rather than slides, down
the hill.
References
[1]. “Galileo’s physical measurements” Stillman Drake, Am.J.Phys 54 (1986) 302-306.
[2]. Experiment G2 (Gallileo’s Rolling Ball Experiment) in Preliminary/Foundation Year
Laboratory Course Booklet (2006_7).
[3]. The computer generated best fit gave a gradient of 127 s2.m-1.
Aside: This value is at the high end of the values quoted in the text. Looking more
closely it appears almost certain that the student forced the best fit line to go through the
origin. This was a (commonly made) mistake. To do this the student has assumed not
that t2 = 0, h = 0 is an experimental point but that it is a point known with absolute
certainty. While this may at first seem reasonable, after all the time taken to change
172
height by zero amount will take zero time, the trouble is that hides the effects of any
systematic errors from the data analysis. For example, it is quite feasible that a systematic
error could have been made in measuring the release height or in timing the motion. This
might result in a straight line that does not go through the origin, but, a perfectly valid
gradient. The result is that the student has both hidden any systematic errors and
introduced an error into the gradient and consequently into the calculated value of g. If
the student had spotted the error it would not be valid to present erroneous results, the
data would need to be reanalyzed. However, giving the benefit of (a very small doubt)
this report has been written using the assumption that the student did not force the best fit
line through the origin and should be read with this in mind.
4. Report writing.
The style is intended to be very similar to that of a paper presented to a scientific journal
but the level at which it is written should be such that another student with a similar
background but unfamiliar with the experiment would be able to understand what you
have done, why and what it all means. Reports are separated into sections the expected
contents of which are described below. This is followed by some general advice and
comments on changing expectations through the undergraduate course.
4.1 Contents of the different sections of a scientific report
Abstract
This summarizes the experiment in a single paragraph in ~150 words, featuring
particularly the (numerical) results and principal conclusions. It is entirely separate from
the rest of the report, hence concepts introduced in the abstract need to be introduced
again in the main part of the report.
1. Introduction
Describes the background to, and aim(s) of, the experiment and whatever theoretical
background is needed to make sense of your own work being presented.
There is an expectation that the student reads around the subject before writing the report.
This should be reflected in “Introductory”/”Theory” sections that are not solely derived
from the laboratory handbooks. The source material for this should be quoted and
obviously re-written to fit in with the requirements of the report and to avoid plagiarism.
At the same time the “Introductory”/”Theory” sections should be appropriate for the
report and not overwhelm it.
If necessary, for example if the introduction becomes large and difficult to read, the
section can be split in order to have a distinct "Background Theory" section following
on from the more general introduction.
Unfamiliar/obscure derivations may be included but exclude trivial steps.
The theory section may include a number of equations. These should be on a separate
line, numbered and each of the symbols used should be explained the first time they
appear, e.g.:
(1)
E = mc2
-1
where E is energy (J), m is mass (kg) and c is the speed of light (ms ).
2. Description of the experiment and 3. Results
These sections are very flexible and tend to cause the most trouble for students in years
0,1 and 2.
173
There should be descriptions of the main features of the equipment and general
descriptions of how it was set up and used. These should be written in paragraph rather
than point form, should not be in the form of lists and should not be an instruction set for
the experiment. Greater detail should be included where non-standard/unfamiliar
equipment has been used, where subjective interpretations or procedures were employed
or where significant or systematic errors or uncertainties may have occurred.
If only one experiment was performed the logical flow of the report is clear. However, if
the experiment had two or more parts then things can get complicated. Many students fall
into the trap of separating important procedural information from results: e.g presenting
procedure 1, procedure 2, results 1 and then results 2 etc. Reports using this format are
very difficult to read.
Much better is: procedure 1, results 1, procedure 2, results 2 etc. A question to consider
then is how much common experimental information can be placed upfront before getting
deeply into the experiments?
Large amounts of data are usually best presented in either tabular or graphical form,
choose the most appropriate (but usually not both forms). Diagrams and graphs should
be labeled: Figure 1, Figure 2 etc underneath the figure (see example above) and tables as
Table 1, Table 2 etc above the table (se example below) and all should have an
explanatory title.
Explain how the original data were analyzed, for example indicate whether a value is the
average of a number of measurements and/or refer (by number) to the mathematical
equations used (see notes below). However, the actual mathematical working should not
be included. Graphs should show the best fit straight line (but not the error fits) if
applicable and numerical values should always be quoted with their associated errors.
Again, do not show the mathematical working used to obtain errors.
4. Discussion
The discussion section is very important in that it both brings together the previous
sections and is the point at which students can demonstrate “critical awareness” through
interpretation of the meaning of the previously described results.
Other items that might be discussed are: consistency of readings, accuracy, limitations of
apparatus or measurements, suggestions for improvements of apparatus, comparison of
results obtained by different methods, comparison with theoretical behaviour or accepted
values, unexpected behaviour, future work. However it is clear that some of these are
experimental considerations that could equally well be placed in the previous sections in
the case of a complicated/multi-experiment report.
5. Conclusions
Reports should end with a conclusions section. These should summarize the main results
and findings.
6. References
References should be numbered and placed in the correct order in the text (i.e. the
Vancouver system). They can be denoted by a superscript1 in square brackets [1] or by
other (logical) systems.
The procedure can be stated in words in the following way:
174
•
At the point in the report at which it is necessary to make the reference insert a
number in square brackets, e.g. [1], the numbers should start with [1] and be in the
order in which they appear in the report.
•
At the end of the report in the section headed “References” the full reference is given
as follows:
In the case of a book:
Author list, title, publisher, place published, year and if relevant, page number.
e.g. [1] H.D. Young, R.A. Freedman, University Physics, Pearson, San Francisco,
2004.
In the case of a journal paper:
Author list, title of article, journal title, vol no., page no.s, year.
e.g. [2] M.S. Bigelow, N.N. Lepeshkin & R.W. Boyd, “Ultra-slow and superluminal
light propagation in solids at room temperature”, Journal of Physics: Condensed
Matter, 16, pp.1321-1340, 2004.
In the case of a webpage (note: use carefully as information is sometimes incorrect):
Title, institution responsible, web address, date accessed.
e.g. [3] “How Hearing Works”, HowStuffWorks inc.,
http://science.howstuffworks.com/hearing.htm, accessed 13th July 2005
Different publications are likely to insist on one particular system (e.g. Vancouver as done
here or Harvard – authors name and year of publication in text). Lecturing staff may
express a preference.
Appendices
This section is not compulsory but can be used to provide information that doesn’t fit into
or is not vital to the report but the author still wants or needs to present (possibly as
evidence of work carried out). The main text should reference the appendix but it should
not be necessary for the reader to read the appendix to understand the report.
Examples of material included in appendices include: long, non-standard derivations,
computer code, the authors detailed designs for apparatus, results not included in the
report and risk assessments (if required). The appendix should include sufficient
explanation to make sense of this extra information.
Appendices are not usually necessary for year 0,1 and 2 reports but are more common in
years 3 and 4 because of the desire to demonstrate project work.
4.2 General advice
• The report should be written in your own words, i.e. do not plagiarize other peoples
work (including laboratory books, other student’s reports, the web or textbooks).
• Apart from the abstract and conclusions there should be little repetition in reports.
• The past tense is most appropriate and the most commonly used.
• The report should be impersonal (avoid “I”, “we”, “you” etc).
• A well-labelled diagram can be more informative than several paragraphs of prose.
• All diagrams, pictures, graphs and figures should be labelled figure 1, figure 2 etc in
the order they appear and should have a descriptive figure caption.
• Tables should be labelled as table 1, table 2 etc in the order they appear and have a
descriptive table caption.
• Readers will naturally work through the text of the report. This text should therefore
refer to and explain figures, tables equations etc when appropriate. For example,
“Figure x shows…….”.
175
•
•
•
Related to the last point figures and tables should appear at an appropriate place in the
text and be of an appropriate size. The electronic generation of reports means that
there should be no need for full page hand drawn graphs (allow these are still allowed
at Year 0 level).
It is not necessary to include a risk assessment with your final report, the purpose of
that was to ensure your safety when you performed the experiment. However, it may
be required as part of longer reports in the third or fourth years in which case it should
present in an appendix as proof of its existence.
Pages should be numbered and longer reports (3rd and 4th year project reports) should
have a contents page.
4.3 Differentiation between years
1. Style
In essence very little changes of style are expected through the academic years. The aim
is to instill the scientific style of writing from the beginning. Such changes that do occur
reflect the changing content of the report and the audience (reader).
2. Length of reports
Typical report lengths are shown in table 1 for different student years.
Table 1. Typical lengths of reports (pages assumed to be typed and to include diagrams
and tables)
Student Year
Typical word length
0
(1500-2000)
1
(2000-3000)
2
(2000-3000)
3 (interim)
(~3000)
3 (final)
(up to 6000)
4 (interim)
(~3000)
4 (final)
(up to 6000)
3. Scientific content
•
•
•
•
Experiments in years 0 and 1 are highly prescriptive with well defined aims. In year 2
some of the experiments are likely to allow genuine student enquiry. In years 3 and 4
the two semester projects are open ended, student led and with undetermined
outcomes. At the same time the techniques will likely become more sophisticated, the
physics more advanced (and distinct from taught modules) and the results more
numerous.
Early years reports will inevitably be heavily influenced by the laboratory books
provided. Third and fourth year reports will have no such guidance to fall back on
and 2nd year reports sit somewhere in between.
Early reports may use laboratory books and text books as reference sources whereas
3rd and 4th year reports should make increasingly extensive references to research
papers.
Since longer reports are expected in the 3rd and 4th years the style is perhaps less
similar to scientific papers and more so towards a Masters or Ph.D thesis. Ultimately
though it remains “scientific”.
176
DIARY (LAB BOOK) CHECKLIST (also see page 6)
Date
Experiment Title and Number
Risk Analysis
Brief Introduction
Brief description of what you did and how you did it
Results (indicating errors in readings)
Graphs (where applicable)
Error calculations
Final statement of results with errors
Discussion/Conclusion (including a comparison with accepted results if
applicable)
FORMAL REPORT CHECKLIST ( also see page 8 )
Date
Experiment Title and Number
Abstract
Introduction
Method
Results: Use graphs – and don’t forget to describe them.
Indication of how errors were determined
Final results with errors
Discussion
Conclusion (including a comparison with accepted results if applicable)
Use Appendices if necessary
A risk assessment is unnecessary.
177
Document
Category
technical documentation
Views
447
File Size
4 410 KB
Tags
1/--pages
Report inappropriate content